US20170123251A1 - Display device and electronic device - Google Patents
Display device and electronic device Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20170123251A1 US20170123251A1 US15/407,686 US201715407686A US2017123251A1 US 20170123251 A1 US20170123251 A1 US 20170123251A1 US 201715407686 A US201715407686 A US 201715407686A US 2017123251 A1 US2017123251 A1 US 2017123251A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- layer
- display device
- coloring
- substrate
- conductive layer
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
- 238000004040 coloring Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 188
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 claims description 149
- 239000004065 semiconductor Substances 0.000 claims description 68
- 239000011701 zinc Substances 0.000 claims description 32
- 229910052782 aluminium Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 20
- 229910052738 indium Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 7
- 229910052733 gallium Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 6
- 229910052726 zirconium Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 5
- APFVFJFRJDLVQX-UHFFFAOYSA-N indium atom Chemical compound [In] APFVFJFRJDLVQX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 4
- JBQYATWDVHIOAR-UHFFFAOYSA-N tellanylidenegermanium Chemical compound [Te]=[Ge] JBQYATWDVHIOAR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 4
- 229910052718 tin Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 4
- 229910052684 Cerium Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 3
- 229910052746 lanthanum Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 3
- 239000010410 layer Substances 0.000 description 930
- 239000010408 film Substances 0.000 description 170
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 70
- 239000004973 liquid crystal related substance Substances 0.000 description 68
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 56
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 description 56
- 229920005989 resin Polymers 0.000 description 48
- 239000011347 resin Substances 0.000 description 48
- 238000000926 separation method Methods 0.000 description 42
- 229910052581 Si3N4 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 33
- HQVNEWCFYHHQES-UHFFFAOYSA-N silicon nitride Chemical compound N12[Si]34N5[Si]62N3[Si]51N64 HQVNEWCFYHHQES-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 33
- 229910052721 tungsten Inorganic materials 0.000 description 30
- 239000010937 tungsten Substances 0.000 description 30
- WFKWXMTUELFFGS-UHFFFAOYSA-N tungsten Chemical compound [W] WFKWXMTUELFFGS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 29
- 239000003990 capacitor Substances 0.000 description 25
- IJGRMHOSHXDMSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N Atomic nitrogen Chemical compound N#N IJGRMHOSHXDMSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 23
- XUIMIQQOPSSXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silicon Chemical compound [Si] XUIMIQQOPSSXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 20
- 229910052751 metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 20
- 229910052710 silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 20
- 239000010703 silicon Substances 0.000 description 20
- 239000010936 titanium Substances 0.000 description 19
- RTAQQCXQSZGOHL-UHFFFAOYSA-N Titanium Chemical compound [Ti] RTAQQCXQSZGOHL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 18
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 18
- 229910052719 titanium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 18
- XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N aluminium Chemical compound [Al] XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 17
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 17
- 239000011521 glass Substances 0.000 description 16
- QVGXLLKOCUKJST-UHFFFAOYSA-N atomic oxygen Chemical compound [O] QVGXLLKOCUKJST-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 15
- 239000007789 gas Substances 0.000 description 15
- 229910052760 oxygen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 15
- 239000001301 oxygen Substances 0.000 description 15
- ZOKXTWBITQBERF-UHFFFAOYSA-N Molybdenum Chemical compound [Mo] ZOKXTWBITQBERF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 14
- 238000010438 heat treatment Methods 0.000 description 14
- 239000011733 molybdenum Substances 0.000 description 14
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 description 13
- 229910052750 molybdenum Inorganic materials 0.000 description 13
- 238000004544 sputter deposition Methods 0.000 description 13
- GQPLMRYTRLFLPF-UHFFFAOYSA-N Nitrous Oxide Chemical compound [O-][N+]#N GQPLMRYTRLFLPF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 12
- 239000012790 adhesive layer Substances 0.000 description 12
- 239000000835 fiber Substances 0.000 description 12
- 239000011810 insulating material Substances 0.000 description 12
- 238000005268 plasma chemical vapour deposition Methods 0.000 description 12
- 239000000956 alloy Substances 0.000 description 11
- 239000003086 colorant Substances 0.000 description 11
- 238000005530 etching Methods 0.000 description 11
- 229910052757 nitrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 11
- 239000002356 single layer Substances 0.000 description 11
- 229910045601 alloy Inorganic materials 0.000 description 10
- 238000001312 dry etching Methods 0.000 description 10
- 150000002739 metals Chemical class 0.000 description 10
- VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silicium dioxide Chemical compound O=[Si]=O VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 9
- 239000001257 hydrogen Substances 0.000 description 9
- 229910052739 hydrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 9
- KDLHZDBZIXYQEI-UHFFFAOYSA-N Palladium Chemical compound [Pd] KDLHZDBZIXYQEI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- 239000000853 adhesive Substances 0.000 description 8
- 230000001070 adhesive effect Effects 0.000 description 8
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 8
- BLRPTPMANUNPDV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silane Chemical compound [SiH4] BLRPTPMANUNPDV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 7
- 239000011159 matrix material Substances 0.000 description 7
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 description 7
- 230000003647 oxidation Effects 0.000 description 7
- 238000007254 oxidation reaction Methods 0.000 description 7
- 229910000077 silane Inorganic materials 0.000 description 7
- 125000006850 spacer group Chemical group 0.000 description 7
- PXHVJJICTQNCMI-UHFFFAOYSA-N Nickel Chemical compound [Ni] PXHVJJICTQNCMI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 238000003917 TEM image Methods 0.000 description 6
- NIXOWILDQLNWCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N acrylic acid group Chemical group C(C=C)(=O)O NIXOWILDQLNWCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 239000012298 atmosphere Substances 0.000 description 6
- 230000015572 biosynthetic process Effects 0.000 description 6
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 6
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 6
- 230000002349 favourable effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 239000012535 impurity Substances 0.000 description 6
- 229910044991 metal oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 6
- 150000004706 metal oxides Chemical class 0.000 description 6
- 210000005036 nerve Anatomy 0.000 description 6
- 150000004767 nitrides Chemical class 0.000 description 6
- 229910052814 silicon oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 6
- 239000000243 solution Substances 0.000 description 6
- -1 tungsten nitride Chemical class 0.000 description 6
- XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N water Substances O XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 229910001868 water Inorganic materials 0.000 description 6
- 238000001039 wet etching Methods 0.000 description 6
- QGZKDVFQNNGYKY-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ammonia Chemical compound N QGZKDVFQNNGYKY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- UFHFLCQGNIYNRP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hydrogen Chemical compound [H][H] UFHFLCQGNIYNRP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- BQCADISMDOOEFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silver Chemical compound [Ag] BQCADISMDOOEFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 5
- 229960001730 nitrous oxide Drugs 0.000 description 5
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000009832 plasma treatment Methods 0.000 description 5
- 229910052709 silver Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- 239000004332 silver Substances 0.000 description 5
- 229910052715 tantalum Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- GUVRBAGPIYLISA-UHFFFAOYSA-N tantalum atom Chemical compound [Ta] GUVRBAGPIYLISA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 229910052725 zinc Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- VYZAMTAEIAYCRO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Chromium Chemical compound [Cr] VYZAMTAEIAYCRO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- RYGMFSIKBFXOCR-UHFFFAOYSA-N Copper Chemical compound [Cu] RYGMFSIKBFXOCR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- NRTOMJZYCJJWKI-UHFFFAOYSA-N Titanium nitride Chemical compound [Ti]#N NRTOMJZYCJJWKI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 229910021417 amorphous silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 229910052804 chromium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 239000011651 chromium Substances 0.000 description 4
- 238000000576 coating method Methods 0.000 description 4
- 229910052802 copper Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 239000010949 copper Substances 0.000 description 4
- 238000001035 drying Methods 0.000 description 4
- 239000003365 glass fiber Substances 0.000 description 4
- 150000002431 hydrogen Chemical class 0.000 description 4
- PJXISJQVUVHSOJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N indium(iii) oxide Chemical compound [O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[In+3].[In+3] PJXISJQVUVHSOJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- AMGQUBHHOARCQH-UHFFFAOYSA-N indium;oxotin Chemical compound [In].[Sn]=O AMGQUBHHOARCQH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 238000000879 optical micrograph Methods 0.000 description 4
- 229910052763 palladium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 229920001721 polyimide Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 4
- 239000000126 substance Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229910018137 Al-Zn Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 229910018573 Al—Zn Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 239000004983 Polymer Dispersed Liquid Crystal Substances 0.000 description 3
- 208000003464 asthenopia Diseases 0.000 description 3
- 210000004556 brain Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 description 3
- 239000013078 crystal Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000007423 decrease Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000002274 desiccant Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000011161 development Methods 0.000 description 3
- 229910003437 indium oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 239000011256 inorganic filler Substances 0.000 description 3
- 229910003475 inorganic filler Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 239000007788 liquid Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 3
- 229910052759 nickel Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 239000001272 nitrous oxide Substances 0.000 description 3
- 235000013842 nitrous oxide Nutrition 0.000 description 3
- 230000001151 other effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000001590 oxidative effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- TWNQGVIAIRXVLR-UHFFFAOYSA-N oxo(oxoalumanyloxy)alumane Chemical compound O=[Al]O[Al]=O TWNQGVIAIRXVLR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- BASFCYQUMIYNBI-UHFFFAOYSA-N platinum Substances [Pt] BASFCYQUMIYNBI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 229920000139 polyethylene terephthalate Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 239000005020 polyethylene terephthalate Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000009719 polyimide resin Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000007639 printing Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000001681 protective effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 210000001525 retina Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- XOLBLPGZBRYERU-UHFFFAOYSA-N tin dioxide Chemical compound O=[Sn]=O XOLBLPGZBRYERU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 239000004925 Acrylic resin Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229920000178 Acrylic resin Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229910018120 Al-Ga-Zn Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- XKRFYHLGVUSROY-UHFFFAOYSA-N Argon Chemical compound [Ar] XKRFYHLGVUSROY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 206010052128 Glare Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 206010050031 Muscle strain Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 239000004696 Poly ether ether ketone Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000004962 Polyamide-imide Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910020833 Sn-Al-Zn Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 229910020868 Sn-Ga-Zn Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 229910020994 Sn-Zn Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 229910009069 Sn—Zn Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- GWEVSGVZZGPLCZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Titan oxide Chemical compound O=[Ti]=O GWEVSGVZZGPLCZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- XLOMVQKBTHCTTD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Zinc monoxide Chemical compound [Zn]=O XLOMVQKBTHCTTD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- QCWXUUIWCKQGHC-UHFFFAOYSA-N Zirconium Chemical compound [Zr] QCWXUUIWCKQGHC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229910052784 alkaline earth metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 150000001342 alkaline earth metals Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 239000004760 aramid Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229920003235 aromatic polyamide Polymers 0.000 description 2
- GPBUGPUPKAGMDK-UHFFFAOYSA-N azanylidynemolybdenum Chemical compound [Mo]#N GPBUGPUPKAGMDK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- QVQLCTNNEUAWMS-UHFFFAOYSA-N barium oxide Chemical compound [Ba]=O QVQLCTNNEUAWMS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000011248 coating agent Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910052681 coesite Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 150000001875 compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 239000004020 conductor Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910052906 cristobalite Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 238000002425 crystallisation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000008025 crystallization Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000003822 epoxy resin Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000001747 exhibiting effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000005262 ferroelectric liquid crystals (FLCs) Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000011261 inert gas Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000005259 measurement Methods 0.000 description 2
- MWUXSHHQAYIFBG-UHFFFAOYSA-N nitrogen oxide Inorganic materials O=[N] MWUXSHHQAYIFBG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- QGLKJKCYBOYXKC-UHFFFAOYSA-N nonaoxidotritungsten Chemical compound O=[W]1(=O)O[W](=O)(=O)O[W](=O)(=O)O1 QGLKJKCYBOYXKC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000012788 optical film Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000035699 permeability Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000010363 phase shift Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229920002037 poly(vinyl butyral) polymer Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229920002312 polyamide-imide Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229920000647 polyepoxide Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229920002530 polyetherether ketone Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229920000642 polymer Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 239000004800 polyvinyl chloride Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000002035 prolonged effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000000377 silicon dioxide Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000001179 sorption measurement Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229910052682 stishovite Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 238000003860 storage Methods 0.000 description 2
- OGIDPMRJRNCKJF-UHFFFAOYSA-N titanium oxide Inorganic materials [Ti]=O OGIDPMRJRNCKJF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229910052905 tridymite Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 229910001930 tungsten oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 229910052727 yttrium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- VWQVUPCCIRVNHF-UHFFFAOYSA-N yttrium atom Chemical compound [Y] VWQVUPCCIRVNHF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- YVTHLONGBIQYBO-UHFFFAOYSA-N zinc indium(3+) oxygen(2-) Chemical compound [O--].[Zn++].[In+3] YVTHLONGBIQYBO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- VHUUQVKOLVNVRT-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ammonium hydroxide Chemical compound [NH4+].[OH-] VHUUQVKOLVNVRT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910014263 BrF3 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- OKTJSMMVPCPJKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Carbon Chemical compound [C] OKTJSMMVPCPJKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920000049 Carbon (fiber) Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004986 Cholesteric liquid crystals (ChLC) Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910020323 ClF3 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- KRHYYFGTRYWZRS-UHFFFAOYSA-M Fluoride anion Chemical compound [F-] KRHYYFGTRYWZRS-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- MHAJPDPJQMAIIY-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hydrogen peroxide Chemical compound OO MHAJPDPJQMAIIY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910001182 Mo alloy Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000004988 Nematic liquid crystal Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052779 Neodymium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- CBENFWSGALASAD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ozone Chemical compound [O-][O+]=O CBENFWSGALASAD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920012266 Poly(ether sulfone) PES Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004698 Polyethylene Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004642 Polyimide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004372 Polyvinyl alcohol Substances 0.000 description 1
- KJTLSVCANCCWHF-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ruthenium Chemical compound [Ru] KJTLSVCANCCWHF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910020944 Sn-Mg Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- ATJFFYVFTNAWJD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Tin Chemical compound [Sn] ATJFFYVFTNAWJD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910001080 W alloy Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910021536 Zeolite Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- HCHKCACWOHOZIP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Zinc Chemical compound [Zn] HCHKCACWOHOZIP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910009369 Zn Mg Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910007573 Zn-Mg Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 230000001133 acceleration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910052783 alkali metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 150000001340 alkali metals Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000005407 aluminoborosilicate glass Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000005354 aluminosilicate glass Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910021529 ammonia Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 235000011114 ammonium hydroxide Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229910052786 argon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000004380 ashing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910052788 barium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- DSAJWYNOEDNPEQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N barium atom Chemical compound [Ba] DSAJWYNOEDNPEQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000004888 barrier function Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005452 bending Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000004397 blinking Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000903 blocking effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000005388 borosilicate glass Substances 0.000 description 1
- BRPQOXSCLDDYGP-UHFFFAOYSA-N calcium oxide Chemical compound [O-2].[Ca+2] BRPQOXSCLDDYGP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ODINCKMPIJJUCX-UHFFFAOYSA-N calcium oxide Inorganic materials [Ca]=O ODINCKMPIJJUCX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000000292 calcium oxide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052799 carbon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000004917 carbon fiber Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000015556 catabolic process Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005229 chemical vapour deposition Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000001886 ciliary effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910017052 cobalt Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000010941 cobalt Substances 0.000 description 1
- GUTLYIVDDKVIGB-UHFFFAOYSA-N cobalt atom Chemical compound [Co] GUTLYIVDDKVIGB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000001925 cycloalkenes Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000003247 decreasing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000007547 defect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000994 depressogenic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000009792 diffusion process Methods 0.000 description 1
- HNPSIPDUKPIQMN-UHFFFAOYSA-N dioxosilane;oxo(oxoalumanyloxy)alumane Chemical compound O=[Si]=O.O=[Al]O[Al]=O HNPSIPDUKPIQMN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000007599 discharging Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000006073 displacement reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000005684 electric field Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000005038 ethylene vinyl acetate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000011156 evaluation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000001704 evaporation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000000605 extraction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000945 filler Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000011049 filling Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000007274 generation of a signal involved in cell-cell signaling Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000004313 glare Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000005484 gravity Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000003949 imides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000006872 improvement Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000002484 inorganic compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229910010272 inorganic material Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000012905 input function Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910052741 iridium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- GKOZUEZYRPOHIO-UHFFFAOYSA-N iridium atom Chemical compound [Ir] GKOZUEZYRPOHIO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000005389 magnetism Effects 0.000 description 1
- VNWKTOKETHGBQD-UHFFFAOYSA-N methane Chemical compound C VNWKTOKETHGBQD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000013081 microcrystal Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000011259 mixed solution Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000002156 mixing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910021421 monocrystalline silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 210000003205 muscle Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- QEFYFXOXNSNQGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N neodymium atom Chemical compound [Nd] QEFYFXOXNSNQGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052758 niobium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000010955 niobium Substances 0.000 description 1
- GUCVJGMIXFAOAE-UHFFFAOYSA-N niobium atom Chemical compound [Nb] GUCVJGMIXFAOAE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004745 nonwoven fabric Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000007645 offset printing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000002894 organic compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000010355 oscillation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910052762 osmium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- SYQBFIAQOQZEGI-UHFFFAOYSA-N osmium atom Chemical compound [Os] SYQBFIAQOQZEGI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000003071 parasitic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000002245 particle Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000000059 patterning Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000005011 phenolic resin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000000016 photochemical curing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000000206 photolithography Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000049 pigment Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052697 platinum Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229920003229 poly(methyl methacrylate) Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920006350 polyacrylonitrile resin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920002647 polyamide Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920006122 polyamide resin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004417 polycarbonate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000515 polycarbonate Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229910021420 polycrystalline silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229920000728 polyester Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001225 polyester resin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004645 polyester resin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000573 polyethylene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000011112 polyethylene naphthalate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004926 polymethyl methacrylate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920005990 polystyrene resin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920002451 polyvinyl alcohol Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000915 polyvinyl chloride Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 230000001737 promoting effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000005855 radiation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000002310 reflectometry Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910052703 rhodium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000010948 rhodium Substances 0.000 description 1
- MHOVAHRLVXNVSD-UHFFFAOYSA-N rhodium atom Chemical compound [Rh] MHOVAHRLVXNVSD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052707 ruthenium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910052706 scandium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- SIXSYDAISGFNSX-UHFFFAOYSA-N scandium atom Chemical compound [Sc] SIXSYDAISGFNSX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000007650 screen-printing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000007789 sealing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910002027 silica gel Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000000741 silica gel Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920002050 silicone resin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 238000004528 spin coating Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000005477 sputtering target Methods 0.000 description 1
- MZLGASXMSKOWSE-UHFFFAOYSA-N tantalum nitride Chemical compound [Ta]#N MZLGASXMSKOWSE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920001187 thermosetting polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229910001887 tin oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 description 1
- FQFKTKUFHWNTBN-UHFFFAOYSA-N trifluoro-$l^{3}-bromane Chemical compound FBr(F)F FQFKTKUFHWNTBN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JOHWNGGYGAVMGU-UHFFFAOYSA-N trifluorochlorine Chemical compound FCl(F)F JOHWNGGYGAVMGU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000002759 woven fabric Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000010457 zeolite Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000011787 zinc oxide Substances 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
- G02F1/01—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour
- G02F1/13—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
- G02F1/133—Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
- G02F1/136—Liquid crystal cells structurally associated with a semi-conducting layer or substrate, e.g. cells forming part of an integrated circuit
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
- G02F1/01—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour
- G02F1/13—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
- G02F1/133—Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
- G02F1/136—Liquid crystal cells structurally associated with a semi-conducting layer or substrate, e.g. cells forming part of an integrated circuit
- G02F1/1362—Active matrix addressed cells
- G02F1/1368—Active matrix addressed cells in which the switching element is a three-electrode device
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
- G02F1/01—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour
- G02F1/13—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
- G02F1/133—Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
- G02F1/1333—Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
- G02F1/133345—Insulating layers
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
- G02F1/01—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour
- G02F1/13—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
- G02F1/133—Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
- G02F1/1333—Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
- G02F1/1335—Structural association of cells with optical devices, e.g. polarisers or reflectors
- G02F1/133553—Reflecting elements
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
- G02F1/01—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour
- G02F1/13—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
- G02F1/133—Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
- G02F1/136—Liquid crystal cells structurally associated with a semi-conducting layer or substrate, e.g. cells forming part of an integrated circuit
- G02F1/1362—Active matrix addressed cells
- G02F1/136204—Arrangements to prevent high voltage or static electricity failures
-
- H01L27/1225—
-
- H01L29/24—
-
- H01L29/7869—
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10D—INORGANIC ELECTRIC SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES
- H10D30/00—Field-effect transistors [FET]
- H10D30/60—Insulated-gate field-effect transistors [IGFET]
- H10D30/67—Thin-film transistors [TFT]
- H10D30/674—Thin-film transistors [TFT] characterised by the active materials
- H10D30/6755—Oxide semiconductors, e.g. zinc oxide, copper aluminium oxide or cadmium stannate
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10D—INORGANIC ELECTRIC SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES
- H10D62/00—Semiconductor bodies, or regions thereof, of devices having potential barriers
- H10D62/80—Semiconductor bodies, or regions thereof, of devices having potential barriers characterised by the materials
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10D—INORGANIC ELECTRIC SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES
- H10D86/00—Integrated devices formed in or on insulating or conducting substrates, e.g. formed in silicon-on-insulator [SOI] substrates or on stainless steel or glass substrates
- H10D86/40—Integrated devices formed in or on insulating or conducting substrates, e.g. formed in silicon-on-insulator [SOI] substrates or on stainless steel or glass substrates characterised by multiple TFTs
- H10D86/421—Integrated devices formed in or on insulating or conducting substrates, e.g. formed in silicon-on-insulator [SOI] substrates or on stainless steel or glass substrates characterised by multiple TFTs having a particular composition, shape or crystalline structure of the active layer
- H10D86/423—Integrated devices formed in or on insulating or conducting substrates, e.g. formed in silicon-on-insulator [SOI] substrates or on stainless steel or glass substrates characterised by multiple TFTs having a particular composition, shape or crystalline structure of the active layer comprising semiconductor materials not belonging to the Group IV, e.g. InGaZnO
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10D—INORGANIC ELECTRIC SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES
- H10D86/00—Integrated devices formed in or on insulating or conducting substrates, e.g. formed in silicon-on-insulator [SOI] substrates or on stainless steel or glass substrates
- H10D86/40—Integrated devices formed in or on insulating or conducting substrates, e.g. formed in silicon-on-insulator [SOI] substrates or on stainless steel or glass substrates characterised by multiple TFTs
- H10D86/451—Integrated devices formed in or on insulating or conducting substrates, e.g. formed in silicon-on-insulator [SOI] substrates or on stainless steel or glass substrates characterised by multiple TFTs characterised by the compositions or shapes of the interlayer dielectrics
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10D—INORGANIC ELECTRIC SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES
- H10D86/00—Integrated devices formed in or on insulating or conducting substrates, e.g. formed in silicon-on-insulator [SOI] substrates or on stainless steel or glass substrates
- H10D86/40—Integrated devices formed in or on insulating or conducting substrates, e.g. formed in silicon-on-insulator [SOI] substrates or on stainless steel or glass substrates characterised by multiple TFTs
- H10D86/481—Integrated devices formed in or on insulating or conducting substrates, e.g. formed in silicon-on-insulator [SOI] substrates or on stainless steel or glass substrates characterised by multiple TFTs integrated with passive devices, e.g. auxiliary capacitors
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10D—INORGANIC ELECTRIC SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES
- H10D86/00—Integrated devices formed in or on insulating or conducting substrates, e.g. formed in silicon-on-insulator [SOI] substrates or on stainless steel or glass substrates
- H10D86/40—Integrated devices formed in or on insulating or conducting substrates, e.g. formed in silicon-on-insulator [SOI] substrates or on stainless steel or glass substrates characterised by multiple TFTs
- H10D86/60—Integrated devices formed in or on insulating or conducting substrates, e.g. formed in silicon-on-insulator [SOI] substrates or on stainless steel or glass substrates characterised by multiple TFTs wherein the TFTs are in active matrices
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
- G02F1/01—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour
- G02F1/13—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
- G02F1/133—Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
- G02F1/136—Liquid crystal cells structurally associated with a semi-conducting layer or substrate, e.g. cells forming part of an integrated circuit
- G02F1/1362—Active matrix addressed cells
- G02F1/136222—Colour filters incorporated in the active matrix substrate
-
- G02F2001/136222—
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F2201/00—Constructional arrangements not provided for in groups G02F1/00 - G02F7/00
- G02F2201/12—Constructional arrangements not provided for in groups G02F1/00 - G02F7/00 electrode
- G02F2201/123—Constructional arrangements not provided for in groups G02F1/00 - G02F7/00 electrode pixel
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F2203/00—Function characteristic
- G02F2203/02—Function characteristic reflective
Definitions
- the present invention relates to an object, a method, or a manufacturing method.
- the present invention relates to a process, a machine, manufacture, or a composition of matter.
- One embodiment of the present invention relates to a semiconductor device, a display device, an electronic device, a manufacturing method thereof, or a driving method thereof.
- One embodiment of the present invention particularly relates to, for example, a reflective liquid crystal display device.
- the term “display device” means a device including a display element.
- the display device includes a driver circuit for driving a plurality of pixels, and the like.
- the display device may include a control circuit, a power supply circuit, a signal generation circuit, or the like formed over another substrate.
- liquid crystal display devices generally have a structure in which R, G, and B sub-pixels are provided in a display region and provided with their respective color filters.
- the color filters are provided over a substrate (a counter substrate) which faces an active-matrix substrate (a substrate provided with elements (e.g., transistors) for driving pixels).
- COA color filter on array
- a reflective or semi-transmissive liquid crystal display device which includes a color filter, a pixel electrode, and a reflective layer on the active-matrix substrate side and in which light entering from the counter substrate side is transmitted through the pixel electrode and the color filter and is reflected by the underlying reflective layer and is visually recognized is disclosed (e.g., see Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2).
- Patent Document 1 Japanese Published Patent Application No. 2000-187209
- the color purity of reflected light in a reflective display device can be adjusted by the thickness of a color filter, for example.
- the color purity can be adjusted also by changing a coloring material, such as a pigment, which is used for the color filter.
- a coloring material such as a pigment
- Another problem is low adhesion between the color filter and a surface over which the color filter is formed.
- a photosensitive resin film is formed by applying and drying a photosensitive resin solution in which a coloring material is dispersed. Since the coloring material is dispersed, light intensity at the time of light exposure of the photosensitive resin film decreases in a depth direction, which may cause insufficient photocuring and low adhesion at or around the interface between the photosensitive resin film and the surface over which the photosensitive resin film is formed.
- an object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a novel display device capable of adjusting color purity. Another object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a novel display device with improved adhesion of a color filter. Another object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a novel display device of which productivity is improved. Another object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a novel display device capable of excellent reflective display. Another object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a novel display device with a COA structure that is capable of excellent reflective display. Another object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a novel display device or the like.
- One embodiment of the present invention is a display device which includes a pixel region, a transistor formed in the pixel region, a source electrode layer or a drain electrode layer of the transistor, an insulating layer over the source electrode layer or the drain electrode layer, a pixel electrode layer over the insulating layer, and a coloring layer overlapping with the pixel electrode layer and the drain electrode layer.
- the pixel electrode layer is electrically connected to the transistor.
- the coloring layer includes at least a first opening and a second opening.
- the coloring layer may be formed over a counter substrate, and a substrate provided with the pixel electrode layer and the counter substrate may be aligned with and attached to each other such that the coloring layer overlaps with the pixel electrode layer.
- the pixel electrode layer may function as a reflective electrode layer.
- the coloring layer may be a material layer capable of transmitting light in a red wavelength range, a material layer capable of transmitting light in a green wavelength range, or a material layer capable of transmitting light in a blue wavelength range.
- cyan, magenta, yellow, or the like may be used as another color of the coloring layer.
- each coloring layer may have an upper surface shape different from those of the coloring layers of the other colors, and for example, may have a different opening shape.
- a plurality of coloring layers are not necessarily formed over one substrate, and for example, the counter substrate may be provided with a first coloring layer and the substrate provided with the transistor may be provided with a second coloring layer and a third coloring layer.
- the display device may further include a second coloring layer and a third coloring layer.
- the second coloring layer includes at least a third opening and a fourth opening.
- Upper surface shapes of the third opening and the fourth opening are different from those of the first opening and the second opening.
- Another embodiment of the present invention is a display device which includes a pixel region, a transistor formed in the pixel region, a reflective electrode layer formed on the same surface as a source electrode layer or a drain electrode layer of the transistor, a first insulating layer over the reflective electrode layer, a coloring layer which is over the first insulating layer and overlaps with the reflective electrode layer, a second insulating layer over the coloring layer, and a pixel electrode layer over the second insulating layer.
- the coloring layer includes at least a first opening and a second opening.
- the pixel electrode layer is electrically connected to the transistor through the first opening.
- the second insulating layer is in contact with the first insulating layer in the second opening.
- Another embodiment of the present invention is a display device which includes a pixel region, a transistor formed in the pixel region, a reflective electrode layer formed on the same surface as a source electrode layer or a drain electrode layer of the transistor, a first insulating layer including an inorganic insulating material over the reflective electrode layer, a coloring layer which is over the first insulating layer and overlaps with the reflective electrode layer, a second insulating layer including an organic insulating material over the coloring layer, and a pixel electrode layer over the second insulating layer.
- the coloring layer includes at least a first opening and a second opening.
- the pixel electrode layer is electrically connected to the transistor through the first opening.
- the second insulating layer is in contact with the first insulating layer in the second opening.
- the transistor include a gate electrode layer, a gate insulating layer over the gate electrode layer, a semiconductor layer over the gate insulating layer, and the source electrode layer and the drain electrode layer which are in contact with the gate insulating layer and the semiconductor layer.
- the first insulating layer include a third opening overlapping with the first opening and the pixel electrode layer be electrically connected to the drain electrode layer of the transistor through the first opening and the third opening.
- the semiconductor layer be an oxide semiconductor layer.
- the oxide semiconductor layer preferably includes an oxide represented by an In-M-Zn oxide that contains at least indium (In), zinc (Zn), and M (M represents Al, Ga, Ge, Y, Zr, Sn, La, Ce, or Hf).
- a touch panel may overlap with the pixel region, or the counter substrate may be provided with a circuit having a touch input function.
- Embodiments of the present invention also include an electronic device including the above display device.
- a novel display device capable of adjusting color purity can be provided.
- a novel display device with improved adhesion of a color filter can be provided.
- a novel display device of which productivity is improved can be provided.
- a novel display device capable of excellent reflective display can be provided.
- a novel display device or the like can be provided.
- FIG. 1 illustrates a top view of a display device
- FIGS. 2A to 2C each illustrate a top view of a coloring layer of a display device:
- FIGS. 3A and 3B illustrate cross-sectional views of a display device
- FIGS. 4A to 4D are cross-sectional views illustrating a method for manufacturing a display device
- FIGS. 5A to 5D are cross-sectional views illustrating a method for manufacturing a display device
- FIGS. 6A to 6C are cross-sectional views illustrating a method for manufacturing a display device:
- FIGS. 7A and 7B illustrate a cross section of a display device and a method for manufacturing the display device
- FIGS. 8A and 8B are a block diagram of a display device and a circuit diagram of a pixel
- FIG. 9 illustrates a display module
- FIGS. 10A to 10H each illustrate an electronic device
- FIGS. 11A to 11C show optical micrographs in an example:
- FIG. 12 shows a cross-sectional TEM image in an example:
- FIGS. 13A and 13B show cross-sectional TEM images in an example
- FIGS. 14A to 14C each illustrate a top view of a coloring layer of a display device
- FIG. 15 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method for manufacturing a display device:
- FIGS. 16A and 16B each illustrate a cross-sectional view of a display device:
- FIGS. 17A and 17B each illustrate a cross-sectional view of a display device:
- FIGS. 18A and 18B each illustrate a cross-sectional view of a display device:
- FIGS. 19A and 19B each illustrate a cross-sectional view of a display device
- FIGS. 20A and 20B each illustrate a cross-sectional view of a display device
- FIG. 21 illustrates a top view of a display device
- FIGS. 22A and 22B each illustrate a top view of a coloring layer of a display device
- FIGS. 23A and 23B each illustrate a cross-sectional view of a display device:
- FIGS. 24A and 24B are a diagram illustrating a method for measuring reflectance and a graph showing reflectance
- FIGS. 25A and 25B show a photograph of a display device and characteristics of the display device
- FIG. 26 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a display device:
- FIGS. 27A and 27B are conceptual diagrams each illustrating an example of a driving method of a display device.
- FIG. 28 is a graph showing changes in images caused by a refresh operation.
- a transistor is an element having at least three terminals of a gate, a drain, and a source.
- the transistor has a channel region between a drain (a drain terminal, a drain region, or a drain electrode layer) and a source (a source terminal, a source region, or a source electrode layer), and current can flow through the drain, the channel region, and the source.
- Source and drain Functions of a “source” and a “drain” are sometimes replaced with each other when a transistor of opposite polarity is used or when the direction of current flowing is changed in circuit operation, for example. Therefore, the terms “source” and “drain” can be replaced with each other in this specification and the like.
- the term “electrically connected” includes the case where components are connected through an object having any electric function.
- an object having any electric function there is no particular limitation on an “object having any electric function” as long as electric signals can be transmitted and received between components that are connected through the object.
- Examples of an “object having any electric function” include a switching element such as a transistor, a resistor, an inductor, a capacitor, and an element with a variety of functions, as well as an electrode and a wiring.
- a pixel region includes at least a pixel (corresponding to a display unit that can control the luminance of one color element (e.g., any one of R (red), G (green), and B (blue))). Therefore, in a color display device, the minimum display unit of a color image is composed of three pixels of an R pixel, a G pixel, and a B pixel.
- the colors of the color elements for displaying color images are not limited to three colors, and may be more than three colors or may include a color other than R, G, and B.
- a display unit may be composed of four pixels of the R pixel, the G pixel, the B pixel, and a W (white) pixel.
- a display unit may be composed of a plurality of color elements among R, G, and B as in PenTile layout.
- FIG. 1 a display device of one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 1 , FIGS. 2A to 2C , FIGS. 3A and 3B , FIGS. 4A to 4D .
- FIGS. 5A to 5D and FIGS. 6A to 6C .
- FIG. 1 illustrates a top view of an example of a display device of one embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 1 which shows some pixel regions (three pixels) in the display device, components such as a gate insulating layer are partly omitted to avoid complexity.
- a transistor 150 includes a conductive layer 104 a serving as a gate electrode layer, a gate insulating layer (not illustrated in FIG. 1 ), a semiconductor layer 108 where a channel region is formed, a conductive layer 110 b _ 1 serving as a source electrode layer, and a conductive layer 10 b _ 2 serving as a drain electrode layer.
- a gate line 104 including the conductive layer 104 a serving as the gate electrode layer of the transistor 150 extends in the horizontal direction
- a source line 110 including the conductive layer 110 b _ 1 serving as the source electrode layer of the transistor 150 extends in the vertical direction.
- a pixel region 120 is formed in a region defined by two gate lines 104 adjacent to each other and two source lines 110 adjacent to each other. In this manner, the transistor 150 is formed in the pixel region 120 .
- a conductive layer 104 b that is formed in the same step as the conductive layer 104 a serving as a gate electrode layer and the conductive layer 110 b _ 2 that serves as a drain electrode layer are stacked with an insulating layer that is formed in the same step as the gate insulating layer positioned therebetween.
- the conductive layer 104 b , the insulating layer that is formed in the same step as the gate insulating layer, and the conductive layer 110 b _ 2 form a capacitor 152 .
- the transistor 150 is electrically connected to a pixel electrode layer 118 .
- the pixel electrode layer 118 is electrically connected to the conductive layer 110 b _ 2 that serves as the drain electrode layer of the transistor 150 , through an opening 134 and an opening 138 .
- the area of a region where the source line 110 including the conductive layer 110 b _ 1 and the gate line 104 including the conductive layer 104 a intersect with each other be small as illustrated in FIG. 1 . Reducing the area of the source line 110 and the area of the gate line 104 can reduce parasitic capacitance that can be generated between the source line 110 and the gate line 104 .
- the pixel region 120 includes a conductive layer 110 b _ 3 that is formed in the same step as the conductive layer 110 b _ 1 serving as the source electrode layer of the transistor 150 and the conductive layer 110 b _ 2 serving as the drain electrode layer of the transistor 150 .
- the conductive layer 110 b _ 3 has a function of a reflective electrode layer.
- the conductive layer 110 b _ 3 overlaps with a coloring layer 114 .
- the coloring layer 114 overlaps with the pixel electrode layer 118 .
- the display device in this embodiment performs color display with the use of light reflected by the conductive layer 110 b _ 3 serving as a reflective electrode layer.
- the conductive layer 110 b _ 3 has a function of a capacitor line.
- the conductive layer 110 b _ 3 is connected to that in an adjacent pixel.
- the coloring layer 114 has an opening 134 serving as a first opening and an opening 136 serving as a second opening. Note that FIG. 1 illustrates a structure in which one pixel is provided with 16 openings 136 . However, the shape or number of openings 136 is not limited to this example.
- the opening 134 serves as an opening for connection between the transistor 150 and the pixel electrode layer 118 .
- the opening 136 has a function of adjusting the color purity of the coloring layer 114 . In other words, the color purity of the coloring layer 114 can be adjusted with the shape or number of openings 136 .
- Such a structure in which the coloring layer 114 has the opening 136 makes it easy to adjust the color purity of the coloring layer 114 .
- FIG. 2A is a top view of the coloring layer 114 . Note that in FIG. 2A , components other than the coloring layer 114 are omitted. In addition, FIG. 2A corresponds to a top view of one pixel.
- the coloring layer 114 illustrated in FIG. 2A has the opening 134 and the openings 136 .
- a region overlapping with the coloring layer 114 of an adjacent pixel here the coloring layer 114 of an upper adjacent pixel, is denoted by a region 141
- a region overlapping with the coloring layer 114 of a lower adjacent pixel is denoted by a region 142 .
- Such an arrangement in which one pixel overlaps with part of the coloring layer 114 of an adjacent pixel can suppress light reflection by the gate line 104 or the source line 110 .
- part of the coloring layer 114 can function as a so-called black matrix (BM).
- FIG. 2A illustrates, as an example, a structure in which the coloring layers 114 of adjacent pixels on both sides separately overlap with the coloring layer 114 ; however, the present invention is not limited to this structure.
- each of the coloring layers 114 of the adjacent pixels may overlap with the coloring layer 114 .
- surface unevenness in the pixel region 120 or around the pixel region 120 may increase.
- a black coloring layer serving as a black matrix (BM) may be provided around the pixel region 120 .
- FIGS. 2B and 2C illustrate modification examples of the coloring layer 114 in FIG. 2A .
- the coloring layer 114 in FIG. 2B differs from the coloring layer 114 in FIG. 2A in the shape of the opening 134 and the shape and arrangement of the openings 136 .
- the coloring layer 114 in FIG. 2C differs from the coloring layer 114 in FIG. 2A in the shape of the opening 134 and the shape and arrangement of the openings 136 .
- the shapes, numbers, or arrangement of the opening 134 and the openings 136 of the coloring layer 114 can be variously changed to adjust the color purity of the coloring layer 114 .
- the openings 136 illustrated in FIG. 1 and FIGS. 2A to 2C have quadrilateral shapes, the present invention is not limited to these examples and the openings 136 may have a circular shape, an elliptical shape, or the like.
- the shape and arrangement of the coloring layer 114 , the opening 134 , the openings 136 , and the like may be changed depending on the color of the pixel.
- the structure in FIG. 2A may be adopted for an R pixel; the structure in FIG. 2B may be adopted for a G pixel; and the structure in FIG. 2C may be adopted for a B pixel.
- a structure not provided with the coloring layer 114 may be adopted, or the opening 134 or the openings 136 may be larger than those in pixels of other colors.
- a transmissive region 401 may be provided in one pixel.
- a semi-transmissive display device including the transmissive region 401 and a reflective region 400 may be formed.
- FIGS. 14A to 14C illustrate examples in which the upper surface shapes of the coloring layers 114 in FIGS. 2A to 2C are used in semi-transmissive display devices. As illustrated in FIGS. 14A to 14C , it is possible that the opening 136 is not provided in the transmissive region 401 .
- FIG. 3A is a cross-sectional view corresponding to a cross section taken along dashed-dotted line X 1 -Y 1 in FIG. 1 .
- FIG. 3B is a cross-sectional view corresponding to a cross section taken along dashed-dotted line X 2 -Y 2 in FIG. 1 .
- the display device in FIG. 3A includes a first substrate 102 ; the conductive layer 104 a serving as a gate electrode layer over the first substrate 102 ; the conductive layer 104 b formed in the same step as the conductive layer 104 a ; an insulating layer 106 a and an insulating layer 106 b over the first substrate 102 and the conductive layers 104 a and 104 b ; the semiconductor layer 108 which is over the insulating layer 106 b and overlaps with the conductive layer 104 a ; a conductive layer 110 a _ 1 serving as a source electrode layer over the semiconductor layer 108 and the insulating layer 106 b ; a conductive layer 110 a _ 2 serving as a drain electrode layer over the semiconductor layer 108 and the insulating layer 106 b ; a conductive layer 110 a _ 3 formed in the same step as the conductive layers 110 a _ 1 and 110 a _ 2 ; the conductive layers 110 b _ 1
- the conductive layer 104 a , the insulating layers 106 a and 106 b , the semiconductor layer 108 , and the conductive layers 110 a _ 1 , 110 a 2 , 110 b _ 1 , and 110 b _ 2 form the transistor 150 .
- the conductive layer 104 b , the insulating layers 106 a and 106 b , and the conductive layers 110 a _ 3 and 110 b _ 3 form the capacitor 152 .
- a portion of the insulating layers 106 a and 106 b which overlaps with the conductive layer 104 a serving as a gate electrode layer has a function of a gate insulating layer of the transistor 150 , and a portion thereof which overlaps with the conductive layer 104 b has a function of a dielectric layer of the capacitor 152 .
- the insulating layers 106 a and 106 b are provided with an opening 132 which reaches the conductive layer 104 b , and the conductive layers 110 a _ 2 and 110 b _ 2 having a function of a drain electrode layer of the transistor 150 are connected to the conductive layer 104 b through the opening 132 .
- the opening 132 is provided is described here; however, one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to this example.
- a structure in which the opening is not provided as illustrated in FIG. 16A may be employed.
- the conductive layer 110 b _ 3 is included in the same island as the conductive layer 110 b _ 2 .
- the conductive layer 110 a _ 3 is included in the same island as the conductive layer 110 a _ 2 .
- the conductive layer 104 b can serve as a capacitor line. Accordingly, in such a case, the conductive layer 104 b is preferably provided so as to extend in a direction substantially parallel to the conductive layer 104 a or the gate line 104 .
- the coloring layer 114 is provided with the opening 134 and the openings 136 .
- the insulating layer 116 over the coloring layer 114 is in contact with the insulating layer 112 in the opening 134 .
- the adhesion of the insulating layer 116 to the insulating layer 112 is higher than that of the coloring layer 114 . Therefore, when there is a region where the insulating layer 116 and the insulating layer 112 are in contact with each other, separation of the coloring layer 114 can be suppressed even in the case where the adhesion between the coloring layer 114 and the insulating layer 112 is not sufficient.
- the insulating layer 112 is preferably formed with an inorganic insulating material.
- the insulating layer 116 is preferably formed with an organic insulating material.
- the insulating layer 112 can have favorable characteristics of the interface with the semiconductor layer 108 .
- the pixel electrode layer 118 formed over the insulating layer 116 can have high flatness.
- the color purity of the coloring layer 114 can be adjusted with the openings 136 provided in the coloring layer 114 .
- the color purity of the coloring layer 114 can be adjusted by adjusting the shape of the openings 136 or the area of the openings 136 .
- a novel display device capable of adjusting color purity can be provided. It addition, a novel display device with improved adhesion of the coloring layer 114 used as a color filter can be provided.
- the insulating layer 112 is provided with the opening 138 .
- the pixel electrode layer 118 is connected to the conductive layer 110 c _ 1 serving as a drain electrode layer of the transistor 150 , through the openings 134 and 138 .
- the conductive layer 110 b _ 3 has a function of a reflective electrode layer. Therefore, a highly reflective conductive layer is preferably used.
- the highly reflective conductive layer is formed to have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure including any of metals such as aluminum, silver, palladium, and copper or an alloy containing any of these metals as its main component. It is particularly preferable to use a material including aluminum for the conductive layer 110 b _ 3 in terms of cost, processability, and the like.
- As the conductive layer 110 c _ 1 it is preferable to use a highly oxidation-resistant conductive layer. When a highly oxidation-resistant conductive layer is used as the conductive layer 110 c _ 1 , its contact resistance with the pixel electrode layer 118 can be decreased. This can increase reflectance and decrease contact resistance with the pixel electrode layer.
- the highly reflective conductive layer is used in the reflective region, and the highly oxidation-resistant conductive layer is used in a region for contact with the pixel electrode layer; thus, the display device is a novel display device which is capable of excellent reflective display and in which contact failures between a transistor and a pixel electrode layer are reduced.
- transmissive region 401 may be provided as illustrated in FIG. 16B .
- the liquid crystal layer 166 is provided between the first substrate 102 and the second substrate 162 which faces the first substrate 102 .
- the conductive layer 164 is formed under the second substrate 162 .
- the pixel electrode layer 118 , the liquid crystal layer 166 , and the conductive layer 164 form a liquid crystal element 170 .
- the alignment state in the liquid crystal layer 166 can be controlled.
- the pixel electrode layer 118 and the conductive layer 164 are in contact with the liquid crystal layer 166 ; however, one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to this structure.
- alignment films may be formed in a region where the pixel electrode layer 118 is in contact with the liquid crystal layer 166 and a region where the conductive layer 164 is in contact with the liquid crystal layer 166 .
- the conductive layer 110 b _ 3 serving as a reflective electrode layer, the coloring layer 114 , and the pixel electrode layer 118 can be formed over the first substrate 102 ; thus, as compared with the case where the coloring layer is formed on the second substrate 162 side, high alignment accuracy can be achieved.
- a liquid crystal display device with high resolution e.g., 300 ppi or more
- FIG. 17A illustrates an example including a conductive layer 118 a which is formed at the same time as the pixel electrode layer 118 .
- the conductive layer 118 a can serves as a gate electrode of the transistor 150 .
- the conductive layer 118 a may be connected to the conductive layer 104 a . In that case, the same signal or potential is supplied to the conductive layer 118 a and the conductive layer 104 a . Alternatively, different signals or potentials may be supplied to the conductive layer 118 a and the conductive layer 104 a .
- Conductive layers 199 and 199 a may contain a material used for the conductive layer 110 c _ 1 .
- the conductive layers 199 and 199 a may contain a material similar to the above-described materials that can be used for the conductive layers 104 a , 110 a _ 1 , 110 b _ 1 , and 110 c _ 1 , and the like.
- a conductive layer 199 b may be provided as a conductive layer which is formed at the same time as the conductive layer 199 a through the same film formation step and the same etching step.
- This conductive layer can serve as a reflective electrode when formed using a highly reflective material similar to that used for the conductive layer 110 b _ 3 .
- the conductive layer can form a capacitor when overlapping with the conductive layer 110 b _ 2 .
- the conductive layer 199 b may be connected to the conductive layer 104 b.
- a conductive layer 199 c may be provided as a conductive layer which is formed at the same time as the conductive layer 199 a through the same film formation step and the same etching step.
- the conductive layer 199 c may be provided in a portion for connection to the pixel electrode layer 118 .
- FIGS. 19A and 19B illustrate examples of such a case.
- the conductive layer 199 a may contain a material similar to that of the conductive layer 110 c _ 1 .
- the conductive layer 199 a is not necessarily provided.
- FIGS. 20A and 20B illustrate examples of such a case.
- the display device in FIG. 3B includes the first substrate 102 ; the gate line 104 over the first substrate 102 ; the insulating layers 106 a and 106 b over the gate line 104 ; conductive layers 110 a _ 4 and 110 b _ 4 over the insulating layer 106 b ; the insulating layer 112 over the insulating layer 106 b and the conductive layer 110 b _ 4 ; the coloring layer 114 over the insulating layer 112 ; coloring layers 114 a and 114 b over the coloring layer 114 ; the insulating layer 116 over the coloring layers 114 , 114 a , and 114 b ; the liquid crystal layer 166 over the insulating layer 116 ; the conductive layer 164 over the liquid crystal layer 166 ; and the second substrate 162 over the conductive layer 164 .
- the conductive layers 110 a 4 and 110 b 4 serve as the source line 110 .
- FIG. 3B is a cross-sectional view of a region where the gate line 104 and the conductive layers 110 a _ 4 and 110 b _ 4 serving as the source line 110 intersect with each other.
- the coloring layers 114 a and 114 b are formed over the coloring layer 114 as illustrated in FIG. 3B , surface reflection due to the gate line 104 or the conductive layer 110 b _ 4 can be suppressed.
- the coloring layer 114 a is a coloring layer of an adjacent pixel, here the lower pixel in FIG. 1 .
- the coloring layer 114 b is a coloring layer of an adjacent pixel, here the upper pixel in FIG. 1 .
- the coloring layer 114 may be green (G); the coloring layer 114 a may be blue (B); and the coloring layer 114 b may be red (R).
- part of the coloring layers can function as a black matrix.
- FIG. 1 and FIGS. 3A and 3B are described in detail in Method for Manufacturing Display Device.
- FIG. 1 and FIGS. 3A and 3B A method for manufacturing the display device illustrated in FIG. 1 and FIGS. 3A and 3B is described below with reference to FIGS. 4A to 4D , FIGS. 5A to 5D , and FIGS. 6A to 6C .
- the first substrate 102 is prepared.
- a glass material such as aluminosilicate glass, aluminoborosilicate glass, or barium borosilicate glass is used.
- a mother glass with any of the following sizes is preferably used: the 8th generation (2160 mm ⁇ 2460 mm), the 9th generation (2400 mm ⁇ 2800 mm, or 2450 mm ⁇ 3050 mm), the 10th generation (2950 mm ⁇ 3400 mm), and the like.
- High process temperature and a long period of process time drastically shrink the mother glass.
- the heating temperature in the manufacturing process is preferably 600° C. or lower, further preferably 450° C. or lower, still further preferably 350° C. or lower.
- a conductive layer is formed over the first substrate 102 and processed into desired shapes, so that the conductive layers 104 a and 104 b are formed (see FIG. 4A ).
- a metal element selected from aluminum, chromium, copper, tantalum, titanium, molybdenum, and tungsten, an alloy containing any of these metal elements as a component, an alloy containing these metal elements in combination, or the like can be used.
- the conductive layers 104 a and 104 b may have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure of two or more layers.
- a two-layer structure in which a titanium film is stacked over an aluminum film a two-layer structure in which a titanium film is stacked over a titanium nitride film, a two-layer structure in which a tungsten film is stacked over a titanium nitride film, a two-layer structure in which a tungsten film is stacked over a tantalum nitride film or a tungsten nitride film, a three-layer structure in which a titanium film, an aluminum film, and a titanium film are stacked in this order, and the like can be given.
- an alloy film or a nitride film in which aluminum and one or more elements selected from titanium, tantalum, tungsten, molybdenum, chromium, neodymium, and scandium are contained may be used.
- the conductive layers 104 a and 104 b can be formed by a sputtering method, for example.
- the insulating layers 106 a and 106 b are formed over the first substrate 102 and the conductive layers 104 a and 104 b (see FIG. 4B ).
- the insulating layer 106 a is formed to have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure using, for example, any of a silicon nitride oxide film, a silicon nitride film, an aluminum oxide film, and the like with a PE-CVD apparatus.
- a silicon nitride film with fewer defects be provided as a first silicon nitride film, and a silicon nitride film from which hydrogen and ammonia are less likely to be released be provided over the first silicon nitride film, as a second silicon nitride film.
- hydrogen and nitrogen contained in the insulating layer 106 a can be prevented from moving or diffusing into the semiconductor layer 108 formed later.
- the insulating layer 106 b is formed to have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure using any of a silicon oxide film, a silicon oxynitride film, and the like with a PE-CVD apparatus.
- a 400-nm-thick silicon nitride film can be formed as the insulating layer 106 a , and then a 50-nm-thick silicon oxynitride film can be formed as the insulating layer 106 b .
- the silicon nitride film and the silicon oxynitride film are preferably formed in succession in a vacuum such that fewer impurities are mixed into the films. Note that portions of the insulating layers 106 a and 106 b overlapping with the conductive layer 104 a serve as the gate insulating layer of the transistor 150 . In addition, portions of the insulating layers 106 a and 106 b overlapping with the conductive layer 104 b serve as a dielectric layer of the capacitor 152 .
- silicon nitride oxide refers to an insulating material that contains more nitrogen than oxygen
- silicon oxynitride refers to an insulating material that contains more oxygen than nitrogen
- the silicon nitride film has a higher relative permittivity than a silicon oxide film and needs a larger thickness for an equivalent capacitance.
- the physical thickness of the gate insulating layer can be increased. This makes it possible to reduce a decrease in the withstand voltage of the transistor 150 and furthermore increase the withstand voltage, thereby preventing electrostatic breakdown of the transistor 150 .
- a semiconductor layer is formed over the insulating layer 106 b and processed into a desired shape, so that the semiconductor layer 108 is formed. Note that the semiconductor layer 108 is formed in a position overlapping with the conductive layer 104 a (see FIG. 4C ).
- amorphous silicon, polycrystalline silicon, single crystal silicon, or the like can be used, for example. It is particularly preferable to use an oxide semiconductor for the semiconductor layer 108 .
- the oxide semiconductor preferably includes an oxide represented by an In-M-Zn oxide that contains at least indium (In), zinc (Zn), and M (M represents Al, Ga, Ge, Y, Zr, Sn, La, Ce, or Hf). Alternatively, both In and Zn are preferably contained.
- an In—Ga—Zn oxide means an oxide containing In, Ga, and Zn as its main components and there is no particular limitation on the ratio of In to Ga and Zn.
- the In—Ga—Zn oxide may contain another metal element in addition to In, Ga, and Zn.
- an oxide semiconductor is used for the semiconductor layer 108 .
- first heat treatment is preferably performed.
- the first heat treatment may be performed at a temperature higher than or equal to 250° C. and lower than or equal to 650° C., preferably higher than or equal to 300° C. and lower than or equal to 500° C., in an inert gas atmosphere, an atmosphere containing an oxidizing gas at 10 ppm or more, or a reduced pressure state.
- the first heat treatment may be performed in such a manner that heat treatment is performed in an inert gas atmosphere, and then another heat treatment is performed in an atmosphere containing an oxidizing gas at 10 ppm or more, in order to compensate for desorbed oxygen.
- the crystallinity of the oxide semiconductor that is used for the semiconductor layer 108 can be improved, and in addition, impurities such as hydrogen and water can be removed from the insulating layers 106 a and 106 b and the semiconductor layer 108 .
- the first heat treatment may be performed before processing into the semiconductor layer 108 having an island shape.
- the opening 132 is formed in a desired region of the insulating layers 106 a and 106 b (see FIG. 4D ).
- the opening 132 is formed so as to reach the conductive layer 104 b .
- the opening 132 can be formed by, for example, wet etching, dry etching, or a combination of wet etching and dry etching.
- a conductive layer 109 a , a conductive layer 109 b , and a conductive layer 109 c are formed over the insulating layer 106 b and the semiconductor layer 108 so as to cover the opening 132 (see FIG. 5A ).
- the conductive layer 109 a serves as a barrier metal.
- the conductive layer 109 a can be formed using any material that provides excellent contact resistance between the conductive layer 109 a and the semiconductor layer 108 .
- the conductive layer 109 a is formed to have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure including any of metals such as titanium, chromium, nickel, yttrium, zirconium, molybdenum, tantalum, and tungsten or an alloy containing any of these metals as its main component.
- the conductive layer 109 b which is to serve as part of a reflective electrode layer, is preferably formed using a conductive material with high reflectivity. Further, the conductive layer 109 b serves as part of the source electrode layer and part of the drain electrode layer of the transistor, and therefore is preferably formed using a low-resistance material.
- the conductive layer 109 b is formed to have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure including any of metals such as aluminum, silver, palladium, and copper or an alloy containing any of these metals as its main component. It is particularly preferable to use a material including aluminum for the conductive layer 109 b in terms of cost, processability, and the like.
- the conductive layer 109 c can be formed using any material that provides excellent contact resistance between the conductive layer 109 c and the pixel electrode layer 118 connected later, and a highly oxidation-resistant conductive layer can be used. Note that the oxidation resistance of the highly oxidation-resistant conductive layer is higher than at least that of a material used for the conductive layer 109 b .
- the conductive layer 109 c is formed to have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure including any of metals such as titanium, chromium, nickel, yttrium, molybdenum, tantalum, and tungsten, an alloy containing any of these metals as its main component, or a metal nitride containing any of these materials as its main component. It is particularly preferable to use a material including titanium or molybdenum for the conductive layer 109 c , in which case excellent contact resistance between the conductive layer 109 c and a material (e.g., indium tin oxide (ITO)) used for the pixel electrode layer 118 can be provided.
- ITO indium tin oxide
- a titanium film or a titanium nitride film is used as the conductive layer 109 a
- an aluminum film or a silver film is used as the conductive layer 109 b
- a titanium film or a titanium nitride film is used as the conductive layer 109 c
- a molybdenum film or a molybdenum nitride film is used as the conductive layer 109 a
- an aluminum film or a silver film is used as the conductive layer 109 b
- a molybdenum film or a molybdenum nitride film is used as the conductive layer 109 c.
- the structures of the conductive layers 109 a , 109 b , and 109 c are not limited to the above, and a two-layer structure without the conductive layer 109 a may be employed.
- An example of the two-layer structure is a structure in which an aluminum film is used as the conductive layer 109 b and a titanium film is used as the conductive layer 109 c.
- the conductive layers 109 a , 109 b , and 109 c can be formed by a sputtering method, for example.
- the conductive layer 109 c is processed into a desired shape, so that the conductive layer 110 c _ 1 is formed (see FIG. 5B ).
- the conductive layer 110 _ 1 is formed at least in a region to be in contact with the pixel electrode layer 118 later.
- a conductive layer different from the conductive layer 110 c _ 1 may be formed in the same step as the conductive layer 110 c _ 1 .
- An example of the conductive layer formed in the same step as the conductive layer 110 c _ 1 is a conductive layer formed over a connection portion or an FPC terminal portion.
- the conductive layer 110 c _ 1 when the conductive layer 110 c _ 1 is formed, at least a portion of a surface of the conductive layer 109 b is exposed. A region of the conductive layer 109 b where the surface is exposed serves as a reflective electrode layer later. Examples of a method for forming the conductive layer 110 c _ 1 include a dry etching method, a wet etching method, and plasma treatment. When the conductive layer 110 c _ 1 is formed, the surface of the conductive layer 109 b may become uneven. The uneven surface can diffusely reflect incident light. This is preferable when the conductive layer 109 b is used as the reflective electrode layer because the reflective electrode layer can have improved reflection efficiency.
- the conductive layers 109 a and 109 b are processed into desired shapes, so that the conductive layers 110 a _ 1 , 110 b _ 1 , 110 a _ 2 , and 110 b _ 2 , which serve as the source electrode layer and the drain electrode layer of the transistor 150 , and the conductive layers 110 a _ 3 and 110 b _ 3 , which serve as the reflective electrode layer and one electrode of the capacitor 152 , are formed.
- the transistor 150 and the capacitor 152 are formed (see FIG. 5C ).
- the conductive layers 110 a _ 1 , 110 b _ 1 , 110 a _ 2 , 110 b _ 2 , 110 a _ 3 , and 110 b _ 3 are formed in such a manner that a mask is formed over the conductive layers 109 a and 109 b and regions not covered with the mask are etched.
- a dry etching method or a wet etching method can be used as an etching method.
- the semiconductor layer 108 may be partly etched to have a depressed portion.
- the cross-sectional structure illustrated in FIG. 5C may be formed using a half-tone mask (or a gray-tone mask, a phase-shift mask, or the like).
- a cross-sectional structure illustrated in FIG. 15 is obtained by etching of the conductive layers 109 a , 109 b and 109 c .
- the resist is made slightly smaller by ashing or the like, and then, only part of the conductive layers is etched. As a result, such a cross-sectional structure as illustrated in FIG. 5C is obtained.
- the conductive layer 110 b _ 2 or the like is necessarily provided under the conductive layer 110 c _ 1 .
- one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to this example.
- the conductive layer 110 b _ 2 or the like is not provided under the conductive layer 110 c _ 1 and an insulating film is provided under the conductive layer 110 c _ 1 .
- the insulating layer 112 may be formed thereover without etching of the conductive layers.
- the insulating layer 112 is formed over the semiconductor layer 108 , the conductive layers 110 b _ 1 , 110 b _ 2 , 110 b _ 3 , and 110 c _ 1 , and the insulating layer 106 b (see FIG. 5D ).
- an inorganic insulating material containing oxygen can be used in order to improve the characteristics of the interface with the oxide semiconductor used for the semiconductor layer 108 .
- the insulating layer 112 can be formed by a PE-CVD method, for example.
- a silicon oxide film, a silicon oxynitride film, an aluminum oxide film, or the like having a thickness of greater than or equal to 50 nm and less than or equal to 500 nm can be used.
- a 450-nm-thick silicon oxynitride film is used as the insulating layer 112 .
- the insulating layer is formed using a material that can prevent an external impurity such as water, an alkali metal, or an alkaline earth metal from diffusing into the oxide semiconductor used for the semiconductor layer 108 .
- a silicon nitride film a silicon nitride oxide film, or the like having a thickness of greater than or equal to 50 nm and less than or equal to 500 nm can be used as the insulating layer.
- the insulating layer 112 over the conductive layer 110 b _ 3 serving as a reflective electrode layer is preferably thin.
- the thickness of the insulating layer 112 over the conductive layer 110 b _ 3 is preferably greater than or equal to 1 nm and less than or equal to 100 nm, further preferably greater than or equal to 5 nm and less than or equal to 50 nm. Forming the insulating layer 112 thin over the conductive layer 110 b _ 3 can shorten the optical path length between the conductive layer 110 b _ 3 and the coloring layer 114 .
- the insulating layer 112 over the conductive layer 110 b _ 3 serving as a reflective electrode layer is thinned in such a manner that, after the formation of the insulating layer 112 , a mask is formed in a region other than the conductive layer 110 b _ 3 and the insulating layer 112 over the conductive layer 110 b _ 3 is etched.
- the coloring layer 114 having a desired shape is formed over the insulating layer 112 .
- the insulating layer 116 is formed so as to cover the coloring layer 114 (see FIG. 6A ).
- the coloring layer 114 is a coloring layer having a function of transmitting light in a particular wavelength region.
- a red (R) color filter for transmitting light in a red wavelength range a green (G) color filter for transmitting light in a green wavelength range, a blue (B) color filter for transmitting light in a blue wavelength range, or the like can be used.
- Each color filter is formed in a desired position with any of various materials by a printing method, an inkjet method, an etching method using a photolithography technique, or the like.
- the coloring layer 114 has the opening 134 serving as a first opening and the opening 136 serving as a second opening.
- an organic insulating material such as an acrylic resin can be used.
- an impurity or the like contained in the coloring layer 114 can be prevented from diffusing to the liquid crystal layer 166 side, for example.
- the insulating layer 116 can planarize unevenness and the like due to the transistor 150 or the coloring layer 114 .
- the insulating layer 116 preferably has an opening in substantially the same position as the opening 134 in the coloring layer 114 .
- the opening is formed so as to expose a portion of a surface of the insulating layer 112 .
- the opening 138 is formed (see FIG. 6B ).
- the opening 138 is formed in a desired region so as to expose the conductive layer 110 c _ 1 .
- An example of a formation method of the opening 138 is, but is not limited to, a dry etching method.
- a wet etching method or a combination of dry etching and wet etching can be employed for formation of the opening 138 .
- the pixel electrode layer 118 is formed in a desired region over the insulating layer 116 so as to cover the openings 134 and 138 (see FIG. 6C ).
- a material having the property of transmitting visible light may be used for the pixel electrode layer 118 .
- a material including one of indium (In), zinc (Zn), and tin (Sn) is preferably used for the pixel electrode layer 118 .
- the pixel electrode layer 118 can be formed using a light-transmitting conductive material such as indium oxide containing tungsten oxide, indium zinc oxide containing tungsten oxide, indium oxide containing titanium oxide, indium tin oxide containing titanium oxide, indium tin oxide (ITO), indium zinc oxide, or indium tin oxide to which silicon oxide is added.
- the pixel electrode layer 118 can be formed by a sputtering method, for example.
- the pixel electrode layer 118 is connected to the conductive layer 110 c _ 1 through the openings 134 and 138 .
- the pixel electrode layer 118 is electrically connected to the conductive layers 110 a _ 2 and 110 b _ 2 serving as a drain electrode layer of the transistor 150 .
- the structure over the first substrate 102 can be formed.
- the first substrate 102 and the second substrate 162 are attached to each other and the liquid crystal layer 166 is formed.
- the second substrate 162 has the conductive layer 164 .
- the conductive layer 164 which serves as the other electrode of the liquid crystal element 170 , is preferably formed using a light-transmitting material.
- a material that can be used for the pixel electrode layer 118 can be used.
- the liquid crystal layer 166 can be formed by a dispenser method (a dropping method), or an injecting method by which a liquid crystal is injected using a capillary phenomenon after the first substrate 102 and the second substrate 162 are attached to each other.
- liquid crystal layer 166 there is no particular limitation on materials that can be used for the liquid crystal layer 166 , and a nematic liquid crystal material, a cholesteric liquid crystal material, or the like may be used, for example.
- a polymer dispersed liquid crystal, a high molecular compound dispersed liquid crystal, a polymer network liquid crystal, or the like may be used.
- the display device illustrated in FIG. 1 and FIGS. 3A and 3B can be manufactured.
- an alignment film or an optical film such as a polarizing plate, a circularly polarizing plate (including an elliptically polarizing plate), or a retardation plate (a quarter-wave plate or a half-wave plate) may be provided as appropriate if necessary.
- the polarizing plate or the circularly polarizing plate may be provided with an anti-reflection film.
- anti-glare treatment by which reflected light can be diffused by projections and depressions on the surface so as to reduce the glare can be performed.
- a transmissive region may be provided in an aperture portion of a pixel.
- a reflective region may be provided in one part of an aperture portion of a pixel, and in another part thereof, a transmissive region may be provided. Therefore, one embodiment of the present invention can also be applied to a semi-transmissive display device.
- the coloring layer 114 is provided with the openings 136 .
- the coloring layer 114 is not necessarily provided with the openings 136 .
- the opening 136 is not provided in at least one of R, G, and B pixels.
- the coloring layer 114 is provided with the opening 136 in the reflective region and the coloring layer 114 is not provided with the opening 136 in the transmissive region.
- the coloring layer 114 is provided over the first substrate 102 in this embodiment, one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to this example. Depending on circumstances or conditions, the coloring layer 114 is not necessarily provided over the first substrate 102 . For example, in the case where a W (white) pixel is used in addition to the R, G, and B pixels, it is possible that the coloring layer 114 is not provided over the first substrate 102 .
- Embodiment 1 a modification example of the display device described in Embodiment 1 is described with reference to FIGS. 7A and 7B . Note that portions having functions similar to those in Embodiment 1 are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.
- FIG. 7A is a cross-sectional view corresponding to a cross section taken along dashed-dotted line X 1 -Y 1 in FIG. 1 .
- FIG. 7B is a cross-sectional view illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing the display device illustrated in FIG. 7A .
- the display device in FIG. 7A includes a first substrate 202 ; an adhesive layer 203 over the first substrate 202 ; an insulating layer 205 over the adhesive layer 203 ; the conductive layer 104 a serving as a gate electrode layer over the insulating layer 205 ; the conductive layer 104 b formed in the same step as the conductive layer 104 a ; the insulating layers 106 a and 106 b over the insulating layer 205 and the conductive layers 104 a and 104 b ; the semiconductor layer 108 which is over the insulating layer 106 b and overlaps with the conductive layer 104 a ; the conductive layer 110 a _ 1 serving as a source electrode layer over the semiconductor layer 108 and the insulating layer 106 b ; the conductive layer 110 a _ 2 serving as a drain electrode layer over the semiconductor layer 108 and the insulating layer 106 b ; the conductive layer 110 a _ 3 formed in the same step as the conductive layers 110
- the conductive layer 104 a , the insulating layers 106 a and 106 b , the semiconductor layer 108 , and the conductive layers 110 a _ 1 , 110 a _ 2 , 110 b _ 1 , and 110 b _ 2 form the transistor 150 .
- the conductive layer 104 b , the insulating layers 106 a and 106 b , and the conductive layers 110 a _ 3 and 110 b _ 3 form the capacitor 152 .
- portions of the insulating layers 106 a and 106 b overlapping with the conductive layer 104 a serving as a gate electrode layer have a function of the gate insulating layer of the transistor 150 .
- portions of the insulating layers 106 a and 106 b overlapping with the conductive layer 104 b have a function of a dielectric layer of the capacitor 152 .
- the insulating layers 106 a and 106 b are provided with the opening 132 which reaches the conductive layer 104 b , and the conductive layers 110 a _ 2 and 110 b _ 2 having a function of a drain electrode layer of the transistor 150 are connected to the conductive layer 104 b through the opening 132 .
- the coloring layer 114 is provided with the opening 134 and the openings 136 .
- the insulating layer 116 over the coloring layer 114 is in contact with the insulating layer 112 in the opening 134 .
- the adhesion of the insulating layer 116 to the insulating layer 112 is higher than that of the coloring layer 114 . Therefore, when there is a region where the insulating layer 116 and the insulating layer 112 are in contact with each other, separation of the coloring layer 114 can be suppressed even in the case where the adhesion between the coloring layer 114 and the insulating layer 112 is not sufficient.
- the color purity of the coloring layer 114 can be adjusted with the openings 136 provided in the coloring layer 114 .
- the color purity of the coloring layer 114 can be adjusted by adjusting the shape of the openings 136 or the area of the openings 136 .
- a novel display device capable of adjusting color purity can be provided. It addition, a novel display device with improved adhesion of the coloring layer 114 used as a color filter can be provided.
- the display device in FIG. 7A differs from the display device in FIG. 3A in the following points.
- the first substrate 202 is provided instead of the first substrate 102
- the second substrate 262 is provided instead of the second substrate 162 .
- the adhesive layer 203 and the insulating layer 205 are provided between the first substrate 202 and the conductive layers 104 a and 104 b .
- the adhesive layer 207 and the insulating layer 209 are provided between the second substrate 262 and the conductive layer 164 .
- a material having flexibility can be used for the first substrate 202 and the second substrate 262 . It is preferable to use a material having flexibility and toughness for the first substrate 202 and the second substrate 262 .
- the material having flexibility include an organic resin and glass thin enough to have flexibility.
- An organic resin which has a specific gravity smaller than that of glass, is preferably used for the first substrate 202 and the second substrate 262 , in which case the display device can be more lightweight as compared with the case where glass is used.
- polyester resins such as polyethylene terephthalate (PET) and polyethylene naphthalate (PEN), a polyacrylonitrile resin, a polyimide resin, a polymethyl methacrylate resin, a polycarbonate (PC) resin, a polyethersulfone (PES) resin, a polyamide resin, a cycloolefin resin, a polystyrene resin, a polyamide imide resin, a polyvinyl chloride resin, and a polyether ether ketone (PEEK) resin.
- PET polyethylene terephthalate
- PEN polyethylene naphthalate
- PES polyethersulfone
- a material whose coefficient of thermal expansion is low is preferable, and for example, a polyamide imide resin, a polyimide resin, or PET can be suitably used.
- a substrate in which a glass fiber is impregnated with an organic resin or a substrate whose coefficient of thermal expansion is reduced by mixing an organic resin with an inorganic filler can also be used.
- a high-strength fiber of an organic compound or an inorganic compound is used as the fibrous body.
- a high-strength fiber is specifically a fiber with a high tensile modulus of elasticity or a fiber with a high Young's modulus.
- Typical examples of a high-strength fiber include a polyvinyl alcohol based fiber, a polyester based fiber, a polyamide based fiber, a polyethylene based fiber, an aramid based fiber, a polyparaphenylene benzobisoxazole fiber, a glass fiber, and a carbon fiber.
- glass fiber using E glass, S glass, D glass, Q glass, or the like can be used. These fibers may be used in a state of a woven fabric or a nonwoven fabric, and a structure in which this fibrous body is impregnated with a resin and the resin is cured may be used.
- the structure including the fibrous body and the resin is preferably used, in which case the reliability against bending or breaking due to local pressure can be increased.
- the refractive index of the material having flexibility is preferably high.
- a substrate obtained by dispersing an inorganic filler having a high refractive index into an organic resin can have a higher refractive index than the substrate formed of only the organic resin.
- an inorganic filler having a particle diameter as small as 40 nm or less is preferable, in which case such a filler can maintain optical transparency.
- the first substrate 202 and the second substrate 262 may have a stacked-layer structure in which a hard coat layer (such as a silicon nitride layer) by which a surface of a display device is protected from damage, a layer (such as an aramid resin layer) which can disperse pressure, or the like is stacked over a surface of any of the above-mentioned materials having flexibility.
- a hard coat layer such as a silicon nitride layer
- a layer such as an aramid resin layer
- various curable adhesives such as a reactive curable adhesive, a thermosetting adhesive, an anaerobic adhesive, and a photo-curable adhesive such as an ultraviolet curable adhesive can be used.
- adhesives include an epoxy resin, an acrylic resin, a silicone resin, a phenol resin, a polyimide resin, an imide resin, a polyvinyl chloride (PVC) resin, a polyvinyl butyral (PVB) resin, and an ethylene vinyl acetate (EVA) resin.
- a material with low moisture permeability such as an epoxy resin, is preferred.
- a two-component-mixture-type resin may be used.
- an adhesive sheet or the like may be used.
- the adhesive layers 203 and 207 may include a drying agent in a resin material.
- a drying agent for example, a substance which adsorbs moisture by chemical adsorption, such as an oxide of an alkaline earth metal (e.g., calcium oxide or barium oxide), can be used.
- a substance that adsorbs moisture by physical adsorption such as zeolite or silica gel, may be used.
- the drying agent is preferably included, in which case it can suppress entry of impurities such as moisture into the display device.
- an inorganic insulating material can be used, for example.
- the inorganic insulating material may have a single-layer structure or a multilayer structure of silicon nitride, silicon oxynitride, silicon nitride oxide, aluminum oxide, or the like.
- the insulating layers 205 and 209 have a function of buffer layers.
- a sputtering method evaporation method
- a droplet discharging method e.g., an ink-jet method
- a printing method e.g., a screen printing method or an off-set printing method
- FIG. 7A An example of a method for manufacturing the display device illustrated in FIG. 7A is described with reference to FIG. 7B .
- a separation layer 211 is formed over the first substrate 102 .
- the insulating layer 205 is formed over the separation layer 211 .
- any of the materials described in Embodiment 1 can be used.
- the separation layer 211 can be formed to have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure using an element selected from tungsten, molybdenum, titanium, tantalum, niobium, nickel, cobalt, zirconium, zinc, ruthenium, rhodium, palladium, osmium, iridium, and silicon; an alloy material containing any of the elements; a compound material containing any of the elements; or the like, for example.
- a crystal structure of the layer containing silicon may be amorphous, microcrystal, polycrystal, or single crystal.
- an insulating film such as a silicon oxide film, a silicon oxynitride film, a silicon nitride film, or a silicon nitride oxide film may be formed.
- the insulating film is preferably formed because it can suppress entry of impurities which can be contained in the first substrate 102 to the separation layer 211 side.
- the separation layer 211 can be formed by a sputtering method, a plasma CVD method, a coating method, a printing method, or the like.
- a coating method includes a spin coating method, a droplet discharge method, and a dispensing method.
- a layer containing tungsten, molybdenum, or a mixture of tungsten and molybdenum is preferably formed.
- a layer containing an oxide or an oxynitride of tungsten, a layer containing an oxide or an oxynitride of molybdenum, or a layer containing an oxide or an oxynitride of a mixture of tungsten and molybdenum may be formed.
- the mixture of tungsten and molybdenum corresponds to an alloy of tungsten and molybdenum, for example.
- the layer containing an oxide of tungsten may be formed as follows: the layer containing tungsten is formed first and an insulating layer formed of an oxide is formed thereover, so that the layer containing an oxide of tungsten is formed at the interface between the tungsten layer and the insulating layer.
- the layer containing an oxide of tungsten may be formed by performing thermal oxidation treatment, oxygen plasma treatment, nitrous oxide (N 2 O) plasma treatment, treatment with a highly oxidizing solution such as ozone water, or the like on the surface of the layer containing tungsten.
- Plasma treatment or heat treatment may be performed in an atmosphere of oxygen, nitrogen, or nitrous oxide alone, or a mixed gas of any of these gasses and another gas.
- Surface condition of the separation layer 211 is changed by the plasma treatment or heat treatment, whereby adhesion between the separation layer 211 and the insulating layer 205 formed later can be controlled.
- a 30-nm-thick tungsten film is formed as the separation layer 211 by a sputtering method.
- the insulating layer 205 can be formed using any of the above-listed materials.
- the insulating layer 205 is formed at a temperature of higher than or equal to 250° C. and lower than or equal to 400° C. by a plasma CVD method, whereby the insulating layer 205 can be a dense film with low water permeability.
- the thickness of the insulating layer 205 is preferably greater than or equal to 10 nm and less than or equal to 3000 nm, further preferably greater than or equal to 200 nm and less than or equal to 1500 nm.
- a 600-nm-thick silicon oxynitride film is formed by a plasma CVD method and then a 200-nm-thick silicon nitride film is formed over the silicon oxynitride by a plasma CVD method.
- the conductive layers 104 a and 104 b are formed over the insulating layer 205 . Subsequent steps are similar to those for components in Embodiment 1; thus, components can be formed with reference to the description in Embodiment 1.
- a material to be an adhesive layer is applied to an element substrate where the transistor 150 , the capacitor 152 , and the like are formed (in FIG. 7B , to the insulating layer 116 and the pixel electrode layer 118 ), and the element substrate is attached to a support substrate with the adhesive layer. Then, separation is caused between the separation layer 211 and the insulating layer 205 over the first substrate 102 , and the insulating layer 205 in an exposed state and the first substrate 202 are attached to each other with the adhesive layer 203 .
- any of a variety of methods can be used as appropriate in the step of causing separation between the separation layer 211 and the insulating layer 205 .
- a layer including a metal oxide film is formed as the separation layer 211 on the side in contact with a layer to be separated (in FIG. 7B , the insulating layer 205 , which may also be referred to as a layer to be separated below)
- the metal oxide film is embrittled by crystallization, whereby the layer to be separated can be separated from the first substrate 102 .
- the amorphous silicon film containing hydrogen is formed as the separation layer 211 between the substrate having high heat resistance and the layer to be separated, the amorphous silicon film is removed by laser light irradiation or etching, whereby the layer to be separated can be separated from the first substrate 102 .
- the metal oxide film is embrittled by crystallization, and part of the separation layer is removed by etching using a solution or a fluoride gas such as NF 3 . BrF 3 , or ClF 3 , whereby the separation can be performed at the embrittled metal oxide film.
- a method may be used in which a film containing nitrogen, oxygen, hydrogen, or the like (for example, an amorphous silicon film containing hydrogen, an alloy film containing hydrogen, an alloy film containing oxygen, or the like) is used as the separation layer 211 , and the separation layer 211 is irradiated with laser light to release nitrogen, oxygen, or hydrogen contained in the separation layer 211 as a gas, thereby promoting separation between the layer to be separated and the substrate.
- a film containing nitrogen, oxygen, hydrogen, or the like for example, an amorphous silicon film containing hydrogen, an alloy film containing hydrogen, an alloy film containing oxygen, or the like
- the separation process can be conducted easily by combination of the above-described separation steps.
- separation can be performed with physical force (by a machine or the like) after performing laser light irradiation, etching on the separation layer with a gas, a solution, or the like, or mechanical removal with a sharp knife, a scalpel, or the like so that the separation layer and the layer to be separated can be easily separated from each other.
- Separation of the layer to be separated from the first substrate 102 may be carried out by filling the interface between the separation layer 211 and the layer to be separated with a liquid. Further, the separation may be conducted while pouring a liquid such as water. In the case where the separation layer 211 is formed using a tungsten film, it is preferable that the separation be performed while etching the tungsten film using a mixed solution of ammonia water and a hydrogen peroxide solution.
- the separation layer 211 is not necessary in the case where separation at the interface between the first substrate 102 and the layer to be separated is possible.
- glass is used as the first substrate 102
- an organic resin such as polyimide is formed in contact with the glass, and an insulating film, a transistor, and the like are formed over the organic resin.
- heating the organic resin enables the separation at the interface between the first substrate 102 and the organic resin.
- separation at the interface between a metal layer and the organic resin may be performed in the following manner: the metal layer is provided between the first substrate 102 and the organic resin and current is made to flow in the metal layer so that the metal layer is heated.
- the transistor 150 , the capacitor 152 , and the like formed over the first substrate 102 can be transferred to the first substrate 202 having flexibility.
- transfer from the second substrate 162 to the second substrate 262 can be performed by a similar method.
- the second substrate 262 is not provided with elements such as the transistor 150 and the capacitor 152 , therefore, the conductive layer 164 may be formed directly over the second substrate 262 . In that case, the adhesive layer 207 and the insulating layer 209 are not provided.
- the first substrate 202 and the second substrate 262 are attached and the liquid crystal layer 166 is injected between the first substrate 202 and the second substrate 262 .
- the display device in FIG. 7A can be formed.
- the display device can be flexible.
- the material having flexibility and toughness is used for each of the first and second substrates 202 and 262 , a display device with high impact resistance that is less likely to be broken can be obtained.
- the insulating layer 116 and the insulating layer 112 are in contact with each other in the opening 134 and the opening 136 . Accordingly, the adhesion of the coloring layer 114 is increased, and separation of the coloring layer 114 can be suppressed even in a flexible structure. This is an advantageous effect obtained in one embodiment of the present invention. As described above, the display device of one embodiment of the present invention, in which the adhesion of the coloring layer 114 is increased, is particularly effective in a flexible structure.
- FIGS. 16A and 16B may be similarly used in other drawings such as FIGS. 16A and 16B , FIGS. 17A and 17B , FIGS. 18A and 18B , FIGS. 19A and 19B , and FIGS. 20A and 20B .
- FIGS. 8A and 8B a display device of one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 8A and 8B . Note that portions having functions similar to those in Embodiments 1 and 2 are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.
- the display device illustrated in FIG. 8A includes a pixel portion including pixel regions with display elements (hereinafter, the portion is referred to as a pixel portion 302 ), a circuit portion being provided outside the pixel portion 302 and including a circuit for driving the pixel portion 302 (hereinafter, the portion is referred to as a driver circuit portion 304 ), circuits each having a function of protecting an element (hereinafter, the circuits are referred to as protection circuit portions 306 ), and a terminal portion 307 . Note that the protection circuit portions 306 are not necessarily provided.
- a part or the whole of the driver circuit portion 304 is preferably formed over a substrate over which the pixel portion 302 is formed, in which case the number of components and the number of terminals can be reduced.
- the part or the whole of the driver circuit portion 304 can be mounted by chip-on-glass (COG) or tape automated bonding (TAB).
- the pixel portion 302 includes a plurality of circuits for driving display elements arranged in X rows (X is a natural number of 2 or more) and Y columns (Y is a natural number of 2 or more) (hereinafter, such circuits are referred to as pixel circuits 308 ).
- the driver circuit portion 304 includes driver circuits such as a circuit for supplying a signal (scan signal) to select a pixel (hereinafter, the circuit is referred to as a gate driver 304 a ) and a circuit for supplying a signal (data signal) to drive a display element in a pixel (hereinafter, the circuit is referred to as a source driver 304 b ).
- the gate driver 304 a includes a shift register or the like.
- the gate driver 304 a receives a signal for driving the shift register through the terminal portion 307 and outputs a signal.
- the gate driver 304 a receives a start pulse signal, a clock signal, or the like and outputs a pulse signal.
- the gate driver 304 a has a function of controlling the potentials of wirings supplied with scan signals (hereinafter, such wirings are referred to as gate lines GL_ 1 to GL_X, and the gate lines may also be referred to as scan lines).
- a plurality of gate drivers 304 a may be provided to control the gate lines GL_ 1 to GL_X separately.
- the gate driver 304 a has a function of supplying an initialization signal. Without being limited thereto, the gate driver 304 a can supply another signal.
- the source driver 304 b includes a shift register or the like.
- the source driver 304 b receives a signal (video signal) from which a data signal is derived, as well as a signal for driving the shift register, through the terminal portion 307 .
- the source driver 304 b has a function of generating a data signal to be written to the pixel circuit 308 which is based on the video signal.
- the source driver 304 b has a function of controlling output of a data signal in response to a pulse signal produced by input of a start pulse signal, a clock signal, or the like.
- the source driver 304 b has a function of controlling the potentials of wirings supplied with data signals (hereinafter, such wirings are referred to as source lines DL_ 1 to DL_Y, and the source lines may also be referred to as data lines).
- the source driver 304 b has a function of supplying an initialization signal. Without being limited thereto, the source driver 304 b can supply another signal.
- the source driver 304 b includes a plurality of analog switches or the like, for example.
- the source driver 304 b can output, as the data signals, signals obtained by time-dividing the video signal by sequentially turning on the plurality of analog switches.
- the source driver 304 b may include a shift register or the like.
- a pulse signal and a data signal are input to each of the plurality of pixel circuits 308 through one of the plurality of gate lines GL supplied with scan signals and one of the plurality of source lines DL supplied with data signals, respectively.
- Writing and holding of the data signal to and in each of the plurality of pixel circuits 308 are controlled by the gate driver 304 a .
- a pulse signal is input from the gate driver 304 a through the gate line GL_m, and a data signal is input from the source driver 304 b through the source line DL_n in accordance with the potential of the gate line GL_m.
- the protection circuit portion 306 shown in FIG. 8A is connected to, for example, the gate line GL between the gate driver 304 a and the pixel circuit 308 .
- the protection circuit portion 306 is connected to the source line DL between the source driver 304 b and the pixel circuit 308 .
- the protection circuit portion 306 can be connected to a wiring between the gate driver 304 a and the terminal portion 307 .
- the protection circuit portion 306 can be connected to a wiring between the source driver 304 b and the terminal portion 307 .
- the terminal portion 307 means a portion having terminals for inputting power, control signals, and video signals to the display device from external circuits.
- the protection circuit portion 306 is a circuit that electrically connects a wiring connected to the protection circuit portion to another wiring when a potential out of a certain range is applied to the wiring connected to the protection circuit portion.
- the protection circuit portions 306 are provided for the pixel portion 302 and the driver circuit portion 304 , so that the resistance of the display device to overcurrent generated by electrostatic discharge (ESD) or the like can be improved.
- ESD electrostatic discharge
- the configuration of the protection circuit portions 306 is not limited to that, and for example, a configuration in which the protection circuit portions 306 are connected to the gate driver 304 a or a configuration in which the protection circuit portions 306 are connected to the source driver 304 b may be employed.
- the protection circuit portions 306 may be configured to be connected to the terminal portion 307 .
- the driver circuit portion 304 includes the gate driver 304 a and the source driver 304 b is shown; however, the structure is not limited thereto.
- the gate driver 304 a may be formed and a separately prepared substrate where a source driver circuit is formed (e.g., a driver circuit substrate formed with a single crystal semiconductor film or a polycrystalline semiconductor film) may be mounted.
- Each of the plurality of pixel circuits 308 in FIG. 8A can have a structure illustrated in FIG. 8B , for example.
- the pixel circuit 308 illustrated in FIG. 8B includes the liquid crystal element 170 , the transistor 150 , and the capacitor 152 .
- the liquid crystal element 170 , the transistor 150 , and the capacitor 152 can be those in the display device in FIGS. 3A and 3B described in Embodiment 1.
- the potential of one of a pair of electrodes of the liquid crystal element 170 is set in accordance with the specifications of the pixel circuit 308 as appropriate.
- the alignment state of the liquid crystal element 170 depends on written data.
- a common potential may be supplied to one of the pair of electrodes of the liquid crystal element 170 included in each of the plurality of pixel circuits 308 .
- the potential supplied to one of the pair of electrodes of the liquid crystal element 170 in the pixel circuit 308 in one row may be different from the potential supplied to one of the pair of electrodes of the liquid crystal element 170 in the pixel circuit 308 in another row.
- any of the following modes can be given: a TN mode, an STN mode, a VA mode, an axially symmetric aligned micro-cell (ASM) mode, an optically compensated birefringence (OCB) mode, a ferroelectric liquid crystal (FLC) mode, an antiferroelectric liquid crystal (AFLC) mode, an MVA mode, a patterned vertical alignment (PVA) mode, an IPS mode, an FFS mode, a transverse bend alignment (TBA) mode, and the like.
- the driving method of the display device include an electrically controlled birefringence (ECB) mode, a polymer dispersed liquid crystal (PDLC) mode, a polymer network liquid crystal (PNLC) mode, and a guest-host mode.
- EBC electrically controlled birefringence
- PDLC polymer dispersed liquid crystal
- PNLC polymer network liquid crystal
- guest-host mode a guest-host mode
- the liquid crystal element may be formed using a liquid crystal composition including liquid crystal exhibiting a blue phase and a chiral material.
- the liquid crystal exhibiting a blue phase has a short response time of 1 msec or less and is optically isotropic. Therefore, alignment treatment is not necessary and viewing angle dependence is small.
- one of a source and a drain of the transistor 150 is electrically connected to the source line DL_n, and the other is electrically connected to the other of the pair of electrodes of the liquid crystal element 170 .
- a gate of the transistor 150 is electrically connected to the gate line GL_m.
- the transistor 150 has a function of controlling whether to write a data signal by being turned on or off.
- One of a pair of electrodes of the capacitor 152 is electrically connected to a wiring to which a potential is supplied (hereinafter referred to as a potential supply line VL), and the other is electrically connected to the other of the pair of electrodes of the liquid crystal element 170 .
- the potential of the potential supply line VL is set in accordance with the specifications of the pixel circuit 308 as appropriate.
- the capacitor 152 functions as a storage capacitor for storing written data.
- the pixel circuits 308 are sequentially selected row by row by the gate driver 304 a , whereby the transistors 150 are turned on and a data signal is written.
- the transistors 150 When the transistors 150 are turned off, the pixel circuits 308 in which the data has been written are brought into a holding state. This operation is sequentially performed row by row; thus, an image can be displayed.
- FIG. 9 a display module and electronic devices that can be formed using a display device of one embodiment of the present invention are described with reference to FIG. 9 and FIGS. 10A to 10H .
- a touch panel 8004 connected to an FPC 8003 a display panel 8006 connected to an FPC 8005 , a backlight unit 8007 , a frame 8009 , a printed board 8010 , and a battery 8011 are provided between an upper cover 8001 and a lower cover 8002 .
- the display device of one embodiment of the present invention can be used for, for example, the display panel 8006 .
- the shapes and sizes of the upper cover 8001 and the lower cover 8002 can be changed as appropriate in accordance with the sizes of the touch panel 8004 and the display panel 8006 .
- the touch panel 8004 can be a resistive touch panel or a capacitive touch panel and can be formed to overlap with the display panel 8006 .
- a counter substrate (sealing substrate) of the display panel 8006 can have a touch panel function.
- a photosensor may be provided in each pixel of the display panel 8006 to form an optical touch panel.
- the backlight unit 8007 includes a light source 8008 .
- a structure in which the light sources 8008 are provided over the backlight unit 8007 is illustrated in FIG. 9 , one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to this structure.
- a structure in which the light source 8008 is provided at an end portion of the backlight unit 8007 and a light diffusion plate is further provided may be employed.
- the backlight unit 8007 need not be provided in the case of a reflective liquid crystal display device.
- the backlight unit 8007 is provided in the case of a transmissive liquid crystal display device or a semi-transmissive liquid crystal display device, for example.
- the frame 8009 protects the display panel 8006 and also functions as an electromagnetic shield for blocking electromagnetic waves generated by the operation of the printed board 8010 .
- the frame 8009 may function as a radiator plate.
- the printed board 8010 is provided with a power supply circuit and a signal processing circuit for outputting a video signal and a clock signal.
- a power source for supplying power to the power supply circuit an external commercial power source or a power source using the battery 8011 provided separately may be used.
- the battery 8011 can be omitted in the case of using a commercial power source.
- the display module 8000 may be additionally provided with a member such as a polarizing plate, a retardation plate, or a prism sheet.
- FIGS. 10A to 10H illustrate electronic devices. These electronic devices can include a housing 5000 , a display portion 5001 , a speaker 5003 , an LED lamp 5004 , operation keys 5005 (including a power switch or an operation switch), a connection terminal 5006 , a sensor 5007 (a sensor having a function of measuring or sensing force, displacement, position, speed, acceleration, angular velocity, rotational frequency, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemical substance, sound, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, electric power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, gradient, oscillation, odor, or infrared ray), a microphone 5008 , and the like.
- a sensor 5007 a sensor having a function of measuring or sensing force, displacement, position, speed, acceleration, angular velocity, rotational frequency, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemical substance, sound, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, electric power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, gradient, oscillation,
- FIG. 10A illustrates a mobile computer that can include a switch 5009 , an infrared port 5010 , and the like in addition to the above components.
- FIG. 10B illustrates a portable image reproducing device (e.g., a DVD player) that is provided with a memory medium and can include a second display portion 5002 , a memory medium reading portion 5011 , and the like in addition to the above components.
- FIG. 10C illustrates a goggle-type display that can include the second display portion 5002 , a support 5012 , an earphone 5013 , and the like in addition to the above components.
- FIG. 10 D illustrates a portable game machine that can include the memory medium reading portion 5011 and the like in addition to the above components.
- FIG. 10B illustrates a portable image reproducing device (e.g., a DVD player) that is provided with a memory medium and can include a second display portion 5002 , a memory medium reading portion 5011 , and the like in addition to the
- FIG. 10E illustrates a digital camera that has a television reception function and can include an antenna 5014 , a shutter button 5015 , an image receiving portion 5016 , and the like in addition to the above components.
- FIG. 10F illustrates a portable game machine that can include the second display portion 5002 , the memory medium reading portion 5011 , and the like in addition to the above components.
- FIG. 10G illustrates a television receiver that can include a tuner, an image processing portion, and the like in addition to the above components.
- FIG. 10H illustrates a portable television receiver that can include a charger 5017 capable of transmitting and receiving signals, and the like in addition to the above components.
- the electronic devices illustrated in FIGS. 10A to 10H can have a variety of functions, for example, a function of displaying a variety of data (a still image, a moving image, a text image, and the like) on the display portion, a touch panel function, a function of displaying a calendar, date, time, and the like, a function of controlling a process with a variety of software (programs), a wireless communication function, a function of being connected to a variety of computer networks with a wireless communication function, a function of transmitting and receiving a variety of data with a wireless communication function, a function of reading a program or data stored in a memory medium and displaying the program or data on the display portion, and the like.
- a function of displaying a variety of data (a still image, a moving image, a text image, and the like) on the display portion
- a touch panel function a function of displaying a calendar, date, time, and the like
- the electronic device including a plurality of display portions can have a function of displaying image data mainly on one display portion while displaying text data on another display portion, a function of displaying a three-dimensional image by displaying images on a plurality of display portions with a parallax taken into account, or the like.
- the electronic device including an image receiving portion can have a function of shooting a still image, a function of taking a moving image, a function of automatically or manually correcting a shot image, a function of storing a shot image in a memory medium (an external memory medium or a memory medium incorporated in the camera), a function of displaying a shot image on the display portion, or the like.
- functions that can be provided for the electronic devices illustrated in FIGS. 10A to 10H are not limited to those described above, and the electronic devices can have a variety of functions.
- the electronic devices described in this embodiment each include the display portion for displaying some sort of data.
- Embodiment 1 a modification example of the display device described in Embodiment 1 is described with reference to FIG. 21 , FIGS. 22A and 22B , and FIGS. 23A and 23B . Note that portions having functions similar to those in Embodiment 1 are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.
- FIG. 21 is a top view of an example of a display device of one embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 21 which shows some pixel regions (three pixels) in the display device, components such as a gate insulating layer are partly omitted to avoid complexity.
- FIG. 23A is a cross-sectional view corresponding to a cross section taken along dashed-dotted line X 6 -Y 6 in FIG. 21 .
- FIG. 23B is a cross-sectional view corresponding to a cross section taken along dashed-dotted line X 7 -Y 7 in FIG. 21 .
- This embodiment describes an example in which a pixel electrode layer is used as a reflective electrode and a substrate 162 that is a counter substrate is provided with a coloring layer, a BM 180 , and a spacer 181 .
- the position of overlap with openings in the coloring layer and the position of overlap with the spacer 181 are indicated by dotted lines.
- the transistor 150 has the same structure as that in Embodiment 1 except that a 400-nm-thick tungsten film is used as a conductive layer; thus, detailed description is omitted here. Note that the transistor 150 has a channel length L of 3 ⁇ m and a channel width W of 3 ⁇ m.
- the pixel electrode layer 118 electrically connected to the transistor 150 through the opening 138 overlaps with part of the gate line 104 , and has a large reflection area. Note that the transistor 150 is positioned so as to overlap with the BM 180 .
- As the BM 180 a 200-nm-thick titanium film formed with a sputtering apparatus is used.
- This embodiment describes an example in which openings in the coloring layers 114 have different shapes for different colors of pixels, as illustrated in FIGS. 22A and 22B .
- FIG. 22A illustrates a structure of a B pixel on the counter substrate side.
- the proportion of the area of the coloring layer 114 to the area of the pixel region 120 is 74.6%. Note that the area of the coloring layer 114 is calculated by subtracting the area of the BM 180 from the area of the pixel region 120 .
- FIG. 22B illustrates a structure of each of R and G pixels on the counter substrate side. In FIG. 22B , the proportion of the area of the coloring layer 114 to the area of the pixel region 120 is 44.4%.
- a region overlapping with the opening 138 is indicated by a dashed-dotted line for easy understanding of positional relationship; this does not mean that the structure on the counter substrate side actually has the opening 138 .
- the opening 136 and the spacer 181 are indicated by dotted lines for easy understanding of positional relationship; only the positions are indicated and this does not mean that the structure on the side of the substrate provided with the transistor has the opening 136 and the spacer 181 .
- the upper surface shapes of the openings illustrated in FIGS. 22A and 22B are examples, to which the present invention is not limited, and may be triangular, circular, elliptical, polygonal, or the like or a combination of a plurality of kinds of these shapes.
- the total area of the openings in the coloring layer 114 in the B pixel is at least smaller than that of the openings in the coloring layer 114 in each of the R and G pixels.
- the display device in FIG. 23A includes the first substrate 102 ; the conductive layer 104 a serving as a gate electrode layer over the first substrate 102 ; the conductive layer 104 b formed in the same step as the conductive layer 104 a ; the insulating layers 106 a and 106 b over the first substrate 102 and the conductive layers 104 a and 104 b ; the semiconductor layer 108 which is over the insulating layer 106 b and overlaps with the conductive layer 104 a ; the conductive layer 110 a _ 1 serving as a source electrode layer over the semiconductor layer 108 and the insulating layer 106 b ; the conductive layer 110 a _ 2 serving as a drain electrode layer over the semiconductor layer 108 and the insulating layer 106 b ; the insulating layer 112 serving as a protective insulating film over the semiconductor layer 108 and the conductive layers 110 a _ 1 and 110 a _ 2 ; the insulating layer 116 formed using a photo
- an acrylic based resin film is used, which is formed by applying an acrylic based resin material with a spin coater apparatus and then drying the material in an oven apparatus.
- the coloring layer 114 three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) are used, and green (G), red (R), and blue (B) color filters are formed in this order in desired positions by light exposure and development. Each of the red (R), green (G), and blue (B) color filters is formed so as to have a thickness of 0.8 ⁇ m.
- the conductive layer 104 a , the insulating layers 106 a and 106 b , the semiconductor layer 108 , and the conductive layers 110 a _ 1 and 110 a _ 2 form the transistor 150 .
- the conductive layer 104 b , the insulating layers 106 a and 106 b , and the conductive layer 110 a _ 2 form the capacitor 152 .
- the capacitor 152 has a large area and thus has a large capacitance for charge storage. Thus, it is possible to retain the potential of the pixel electrode for a longer time and to apply a driving mode with a reduced refresh rate.
- a change in voltage applied to the liquid crystal layer can be inhibited for a long time even when the liquid crystal display device is used in the driving mode with a reduced refresh rate. This makes it possible to prevent screen flickers from being perceived by a user more effectively. Thus, the power consumption can be reduced and the display quality can be improved.
- the refresh rate refers to the number of times of image writing per second and is also called driving frequency.
- driving frequency Such high-speed screen switching that is difficult for the human eye to perceive is considered as a cause of eye strain.
- the eye strain is divided into two categories: nerve strain and muscle strain.
- the nerve strain is caused by prolonged looking at light emitted from a liquid crystal display device or blinking images. This is because the brightness stimulates and fatigues the retina and nerve of the eye and the brain.
- the muscle strain is caused by overuse of a ciliary muscle which works for adjusting the focus.
- FIG. 27A is a schematic diagram illustrating display of a conventional liquid crystal display device. As illustrated in FIG. 27A , for the display of the conventional liquid crystal display device, image rewriting is performed 60 times per second. A prolonged looking at such a screen might stimulate the retina and nerve of the eye and the brain of a user and lead to eye strain.
- a transistor with an extremely low off-state current e.g., a transistor using an oxide semiconductor
- the liquid crystal element has a large-area capacitor.
- the number of times of image writing can be reduced to once every five seconds as shown in FIG. 27B .
- the same image can be seen for as long as possible and flickers on a screen perceived by a user can be reduced. This makes it possible to reduce stimuli to the retina and nerve of the eye and the brain of a user, resulting in less nerve strain.
- This embodiment makes it possible to provide an eye-friendly liquid crystal display device.
- the refresh operation needs to be performed such that a change of an image caused by the refresh operation is not distinguished by users.
- the display device according to this embodiment has little change of an image caused by the refresh operation and can perform favorable display.
- the coloring layer 114 formed on the second substrate 162 side is provided with a plurality of openings 136 .
- the color purity of the coloring layer 114 can be adjusted by setting the shape or area of the openings 136 provided in the coloring layer 114 .
- a novel display device capable of adjusting color purity can be provided.
- the insulating layer 112 is provided with the opening 138 .
- the pixel electrode layer 118 is connected to the conductive layer 110 a _ 2 serving as a drain electrode layer of the transistor 150 , through the opening 138 .
- a photosensitive resin may be used so that random projections and depressions are formed.
- the pixel electrode layer 118 is a reflective electrode having random projections and depressions reflecting the random projections and depressions on the surface of the insulating layer 116 .
- viewing angle dependence can be improved.
- a highly reflective conductive layer is used as the pixel electrode layer 118 so as to serve as a reflective electrode.
- the highly reflective conductive layer is formed to have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure including any of metals such as aluminum, silver, palladium, and copper or an alloy containing any of these metals as its main component.
- FIG. 23B is a cross-sectional view of a region where the gate line 104 and the conductive layer 110 a _ 2 serving as the source line 110 intersect with each other.
- the distance between the first substrate 102 and the second substrate 162 which faces the first substrate 102 is maintained by the spacer 181 .
- the alignment films may be formed after the spacer is formed by patterning an organic resin film or by forming a columnar structure using a photosensitive resin.
- the BM 180 is preferably formed in a portion other than at least a reflective region.
- This embodiment can be freely combined with any of the other embodiments.
- a display device of one embodiment of the present invention was manufactured and subjected to optical microscope observation and cross-sectional observation. Details of samples manufactured in this example are described below.
- FIGS. 2A to 2C , and FIGS. 3A and 3B was manufactured in this example. Thus, portions having functions similar to those in FIG. 1 , FIGS. 2A to 2C , and FIGS. 3A and 3B are given the same reference numerals.
- the first substrate 102 As the first substrate 102 , a glass substrate was used. Then, the conductive layers 104 a . 104 b , and 104 c were formed over the first substrate 102 . A 200-nm-thick tungsten film (W) was formed by a sputtering method for the conductive layers 104 a , 104 b , and 104 c.
- W tungsten film
- the insulating layers 106 a and 106 b serving as a gate insulating layer were formed over the first substrate 102 and the conductive layers 104 a , 104 b , and 104 c .
- a 400-nm-thick silicon nitride film was formed as the insulating layer 106 a
- a 50-nm-thick silicon oxynitride film was formed as the insulating layer 106 b.
- the silicon nitride film that is the insulating layer 106 a has a three-layer structure of a first silicon nitride film, a second silicon nitride film, and a third silicon nitride film.
- the first silicon nitride film was formed to have a thickness of 50 nm under the following conditions: silane at a flow rate of 200 sccm, nitrogen at a flow rate of 2000 sccm and an ammonia gas at a flow rate of 100 sccm were supplied to a reaction chamber of a plasma CVD apparatus as a source gas, the pressure in the reaction chamber was controlled to 100 Pa, and a power of 2000 W was supplied with the use of a 27.12 MHz high-frequency power source.
- the second silicon nitride film was formed to have a thickness of 300 nm under the following conditions: silane at a flow rate of 200 sccm, nitrogen at a flow rate of 2000 sccm, and an ammonia gas at a flow rate of 2000 sccm were supplied to the reaction chamber of the plasma CVD apparatus as a source gas, the pressure in the reaction chamber was controlled to 100 Pa, and a power of 2000 W was supplied with the use of a 27.12 MHz high-frequency power source.
- the third silicon nitride film was formed to have a thickness of 50 nm under the following conditions: silane at a flow rate of 200 sccm and nitrogen at a flow rate of 5000 sccm were supplied to the reaction chamber of the plasma CVD apparatus as a source gas, the pressure in the reaction chamber was controlled to 100 Pa, and a power of 2000 W was supplied with the use of a 27.12 MHz high-frequency power source. Note that the first silicon nitride film, the second silicon nitride film, and the third silicon nitride film were each formed at a substrate temperature of 350° C.
- the silicon oxynitride film formed as the insulating layer 106 b was formed under the following conditions: silane at a flow rate of 20 sccm and dinitrogen monoxide at a flow rate of 3000 sccm were supplied to the reaction chamber of the plasma CVD apparatus as a source gas, the pressure in the reaction chamber was controlled to 40 Pa, and a power of 100 W was supplied with the use of a 27.12 MHz high-frequency power source. Note that the silicon oxynitride film was formed at a substrate temperature of 350° C.
- the semiconductor layer 108 was formed so as to overlap with the conductive layer 104 a with the insulating layers 106 a and 106 b provided therebetween.
- a 35-nm-thick oxide semiconductor film was formed as the semiconductor layer 108 by a sputtering method.
- the opening 132 was formed in a desired position of the insulating layers 106 a and 106 b . Note that the opening 132 reaches the conductive layer 104 b.
- the opening 132 was formed using a dry etching apparatus.
- a conductive layer was formed over the semiconductor layer 108 and the insulating layers 106 a and 106 b .
- a 400-nm-thick aluminum film was formed over a 50-nm-thick tungsten film, and a 100-nm-thick titanium film was formed over the aluminum film.
- a conductive layer 110 _ 1 was formed by removing a region other than a desired region of the 100-nm-thick titanium film with a dry etching apparatus. Note that the conductive layer 110 _ 1 is a 100-nm-thick titanium film.
- the conductive layers 110 a _ 1 , 110 a _ 2 , 110 a _ 3 , 110 a _ 4 , 110 b _ 1 , 110 b _ 2 , 110 b _ 3 , and 110 b _ 4 were formed by processing the 50-nm-thick tungsten film and the 400-nm-thick aluminum film into a desired shape with a dry etching apparatus.
- the conductive layers 110 a 1 , 110 a _ 2 , 10 a _ 3 , and 110 a _ 4 are each a 50-nm-thick tungsten film.
- the conductive layers 110 b _ 1 , 110 b _ 2 , 110 b _ 3 , and 110 b _ 4 are each a 400-nm-thick aluminum film.
- the conductive layers 110 a _ 1 and 110 b _ 1 serve as a source electrode layer of a transistor; the conductive layers 110 a _ 2 and 110 b _ 2 serve as a drain electrode layer of the transistor; the conductive layers 110 a _ 3 and 110 b _ 3 serve as a reflective electrode layer; and the conductive layers 110 a _ 4 and 110 b _ 4 serve as part of a source line.
- the insulating layer 112 was formed so as to cover the semiconductor layer 108 and the conductive layers 110 b _ 1 , 110 b _ 2 , 110 b _ 3 , and 110 c _ 1 .
- the insulating layer 112 was formed to have a three-layer structure of a first oxide insulating film, a second oxide insulating film, and a nitride insulating film.
- a 50-nm-thick silicon oxynitride film was formed as the first oxide insulating film.
- a 400-nm-thick silicon oxynitride film was formed as the second oxide insulating film. Note that the first oxide insulating film and the second oxide insulating film were successively formed with a plasma CVD apparatus in vacuum without exposure to the air. Since the first oxide insulating film and the second oxide insulating film were formed using the same kind of material, the interface between these films cannot be clearly defined in some cases.
- the first oxide insulating film was formed by a plasma CVD method under the following conditions: silane at a flow rate of 30 sccm and dinitrogen monoxide at a flow rate of 4000 sccm were used as a source gas, the pressure in the reaction chamber was 40 Pa, the substrate temperature was 220° C., and a high-frequency power of 150 W was supplied to parallel-plate electrodes.
- the second oxide insulating film was formed by a plasma CVD method under the following conditions: silane at a flow rate of 160 sccm and dinitrogen monoxide at a flow rate of 4000 sccm were used as a source gas, the pressure in the reaction chamber was 200 Pa, the substrate temperature was 220° C., and a high-frequency power of 1500 W was supplied to the parallel-plate electrodes. Under the above conditions, it is possible to form a silicon oxynitride film containing oxygen at a higher proportion than oxygen in the stoichiometric composition and from which part of oxygen is released by heating.
- heat treatment was performed to release water, nitrogen, hydrogen, and the like from the first oxide insulating film and the second oxide insulating film and supply part of oxygen contained in the second oxide insulating film to the oxide semiconductor film used as the semiconductor layer 108 .
- the heat treatment was performed at 350° C. in a mixed atmosphere of nitrogen and oxygen for one hour.
- nitride insulating film was formed over the second oxide insulating film.
- a 100-nm-thick silicon nitride film was formed as the nitride insulating film.
- the nitride insulating film was formed by a plasma CVD method under the following conditions: silane at a flow rate of 50 sccm, nitrogen at a flow rate of 5000 sccm, and an ammonia gas at a flow rate of 100 sccm were used as a source gas, the pressure in the reaction chamber was 100 Pa, the substrate temperature was 350° C., and a high-frequency power of 1000 W was supplied to the parallel-plate electrodes.
- the coloring layer 114 was formed in a desired region over the insulating layer 112 .
- a photosensitive resin film was formed by applying a photosensitive resin solution in which a coloring material was dispersed, with a spin coater apparatus and then drying the solution in an oven apparatus.
- the photosensitive resin film serves as a so-called color filter. Note that in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) are used, and green (G), red (R), and blue (B) color filters were formed in this order in desired positions by light exposure and development. Each of the red (R), green (G), and blue (B) color filters was formed so as to have a thickness of 0.8 ⁇ m.
- the coloring layer 114 was formed such that the opening 134 and the opening 136 were provided for each of the above colors.
- the insulating layer 116 having a function of an overcoat was formed over the insulating layer 112 and the coloring layer 114 .
- an acrylic based resin film was formed by applying an acrylic based resin material with a spin coater apparatus and then drying the material in an oven apparatus.
- the insulating layer 116 was formed so as to have a thickness of 2.5 ⁇ m.
- the insulating layer 116 was formed such that an opening is provided inside the opening 134 in the coloring layer 114 .
- the opening 138 was formed in the insulating layer 112 in a position overlapping the opening 134 .
- the opening 138 was formed so as to reach the conductive layer 110 c _ 1 . Note that the opening 138 was formed using a dry etching apparatus.
- the pixel electrode layer 118 was formed over the insulating layer 116 so as to cover the opening 138 .
- the liquid crystal layer 166 , the conductive layer 164 , and the second substrate 162 were not formed over the insulating layer 116 and the pixel electrode layer 118 .
- FIGS. 11A to 11C show optical micrographs of the samples manufactured in this example. Note that the optical micrographs shown in FIGS. 11A to 11C are reflected bright-field images.
- FIGS. 11A to 11C are optical micrographs of the samples with different shapes and arrangements of the openings 134 and 136 in the coloring layers 114 as shown in FIGS. 2A to 2C in Embodiment 1. Note that the shapes and arrangement of the openings 134 and 136 in the coloring layers 114 were changed by changing the shape of a light exposure mask.
- the coloring layer 114 with the openings 134 and 136 of any of the shapes was not separated, and these shapes are found favorable.
- FIGS. 11A to 11C each show a top view of roughly three pixels.
- an upper portion is a pixel region in which a red (R) color filter is used as the coloring layer 114 ;
- a middle portion is a pixel region in which a green (G) color filter is used as the coloring layer 114 ;
- a lower portion is a pixel region in which a blue (B) color filter is used as the coloring layer 114 .
- the proportion of the area of the coloring layer 114 in FIG. 11A to the area of the conductive layer 110 b _ 3 used as a reflective electrode layer in one pixel is 76%.
- the proportion of the area of the coloring layer 114 in FIG. 11B to the area of the conductive layer 110 b _ 3 used as a reflective electrode layer in one pixel is 63%.
- the proportion of the area of the coloring layer 114 in FIG. 11C to the area of the conductive layer 110 b _ 3 used as a reflective electrode layer in one pixel is 41%.
- the proportion of the area of the coloring layer 114 can be easily changed by changing the shape and arrangement of the openings 136 in the coloring layer 114 .
- FIG. 12 shows two TEM images partly overlapping with each other.
- FIG. 12 and FIGS. 13A and 13B brightness, contrast, and the like are adjusted to clearly show interfaces and the like.
- FIG. 12 shows a result of a cross section taken along dashed-dotted line X 3 -Y 3 in FIG. 11A .
- FIG. 13A shows a result of a cross section taken along dashed-dotted line X 4 -Y 4 in FIG. 11A .
- FIG. 13B shows a result of a cross section taken along dashed-dotted line X 5 -Y 5 in FIG. 11A .
- Sub. denotes the first substrate 102 .
- GI denotes the insulating layers 106 a and 106 b serving as a gate insulating layer.
- SiON denotes the silicon oxynitride film used as the insulating layer 112 .
- SiN denotes the silicon nitride film used as the insulating layer 112 .
- W denotes the tungsten films used as the conductive layers 104 a , 104 b , 104 c , 110 a _ 1 , 110 a _ 2 , 110 a _ 3 , and 110 a _ 4 .
- Al denotes the aluminum films used as the conductive layers 110 b _ 1 , 110 b _ 2 , 110 b _ 3 , and 110 b _ 4 .
- Ti denotes the titanium film used as the conductive layer 110 c _ 1 .
- IGZO denotes the oxide semiconductor film used as the semiconductor layer 108 .
- CF(R) denotes the coloring layer 114 for red.
- CF(G) denotes the coloring layer 114 for green.
- CF(B) denotes the coloring layer 114 for blue.
- OC denotes the acrylic based resin film used as the insulating layer 116 having a function of an overcoat.
- ITSO denotes the indium oxide-tin oxide-silicon oxide compound film used as the pixel electrode layer 118 .
- Pt denotes a platinum coating used as a conductive film for cross-sectional observation.
- C denotes a carbon coating used as a conductive film for cross-sectional observation.
- the results shown in the TEM images in FIG. 12 and FIGS. 13A and 13B confirm that the display device of this example has a favorable cross-sectional shape.
- the color filter CF(G) and the color filter CF(R) each used as the coloring layer 114 are stacked over the gate line, the source line, or a region where the gate line intersects with the source line, which is other than a reflective region.
- the color filter CF(R) and the color filter CF(B) each used as the coloring layer 114 are stacked over the gate line, the source line, or a region where the gate line intersects with the source line, which is other than a reflective region.
- the display device of this example has a structure in which the color filter CF(G) used as the coloring layer 114 has an opening, and through the opening, the silicon nitride film (SiN) used as the insulating layer 112 is in contact with the acrylic based resin film used as the insulating layer 116 serving as an overcoat (OC).
- the display device of this example has a favorable cross-sectional shape with improved adhesion of the coloring layer 114 and with no film separation or the like.
- a display device of one embodiment of the present invention was manufactured, a pixel region where an image was displayed was photographed, and its reflectance was measured. Details of samples manufactured in this example are described below.
- FIG. 21 the display device described in Embodiment 5 and illustrated in FIG. 21 , FIGS. 22A and 22B , and FIGS. 23A and 23B was manufactured in this example.
- a display device in which all the coloring layers in R, G, and B pixels had the same shape was manufactured.
- the display device in this example is the same as the display device illustrated in FIG. 1 , FIGS. 2A to 2C , and FIGS. 3A and 3B , except that openings in coloring layers for different colors have partly varying shapes, the coloring layers are formed over a counter substrate, and a pixel electrode is used as a reflective electrode, for example.
- portions having functions similar to those in FIG. 1 , FIGS. 2A to 2C , and FIGS. 3A and 3B are given the same reference numerals.
- FIG. 24A shows the results.
- the upper curve in FIG. 24B represents data obtained from the display device described in Embodiment 5, and the lower curve represents data obtained from the display device in which the coloring layers in the R. G, and B pixels have the same shape that is illustrated in FIG. 22A .
- FIG. 25A shows a photograph of display by the display device described in Embodiment 5.
- FIG. 25B shows a table of characteristics of the two types of display devices.
- the display device described in Embodiment 5 is referred to as high reflective LCD because of its high reflectance, and the other display device is referred to as high color gamut LCD.
- FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram of a configuration example of a display device including a touch panel.
- a display device illustrated in FIG. 26 includes the pixel electrode layers 118 over the substrate 102 ; the coloring layers 114 overlapping with the pixel electrode layers 118 ; the BM 180 between the coloring layers 114 for different colors; the substrate 162 ; a liquid crystal between the substrate 102 and the substrate 162 ; an optical film 183 over the substrate 162 ; a touch panel 184 ; and a polarizing film 185 .
- transistors electrically connected to the pixel electrode layers 118 formed over the substrate 102 are not illustrated in FIG. 26 .
- FIG. 24B and FIGS. 25A and 25B were obtained before a touch panel is provided.
- these display panels include capacitors with a large capacitance.
- a change in voltage applied to the liquid crystal layer can be inhibited for a long time even when the liquid crystal display device is used in the driving mode with a reduced refresh rate. This makes it possible to prevent screen flickers from being perceived by a user more effectively.
- the power consumption can be reduced and the display quality can be improved.
- FIG. 28 shows results of measuring changes in images caused by a refresh operation in the display device of this example. As shown in FIG. 28 , little change is caused in images by the refresh operation in any of white display, gray display, and black display.
- the display device of this example can be used in a driving mode with a reduced refresh rate of 1 Hz or less and can be an eye-friendly reflective liquid crystal display device.
- the display device of this example can also be a low-power-consumption reflective liquid crystal display device.
Landscapes
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Nonlinear Science (AREA)
- Mathematical Physics (AREA)
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Crystallography & Structural Chemistry (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Optics & Photonics (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
- Liquid Crystal (AREA)
- Thin Film Transistor (AREA)
- Devices For Indicating Variable Information By Combining Individual Elements (AREA)
Abstract
A novel display device capable of adjusting color purity is provided. A novel display device with improved adhesion of a color filter is provided. A novel display device capable of excellent reflective display is provided. The display device includes a transistor, a reflective electrode layer formed on the same surface as a source electrode layer or a drain electrode layer of the transistor, a first insulating layer over the reflective electrode layer, a coloring layer which is over the first insulating layer and overlaps with the reflective electrode layer, a second insulating layer over the coloring layer, and a pixel electrode layer over the second insulating layer. The coloring layer includes at least a first opening and a second opening. The pixel electrode layer is electrically connected to the transistor through the first opening. The second insulating layer is in contact with the first insulating layer in the second opening.
Description
- 1. Field of the Invention
- The present invention relates to an object, a method, or a manufacturing method. In addition, the present invention relates to a process, a machine, manufacture, or a composition of matter. One embodiment of the present invention relates to a semiconductor device, a display device, an electronic device, a manufacturing method thereof, or a driving method thereof. One embodiment of the present invention particularly relates to, for example, a reflective liquid crystal display device.
- Note that the term “display device” means a device including a display element. In addition, the display device includes a driver circuit for driving a plurality of pixels, and the like. Furthermore, the display device may include a control circuit, a power supply circuit, a signal generation circuit, or the like formed over another substrate.
- 2. Description of the Related Art
- With the recent rapid spread of portable information terminals such as smartphones, improvement in their performance has progressed rapidly. Their screens have been increased in size and resolution, and some recent ones have resolutions as high as over 300 ppi.
- For example, liquid crystal display devices generally have a structure in which R, G, and B sub-pixels are provided in a display region and provided with their respective color filters. The color filters are provided over a substrate (a counter substrate) which faces an active-matrix substrate (a substrate provided with elements (e.g., transistors) for driving pixels).
- With the increase in resolution, the alignment accuracy between an active-matrix substrate and a counter substrate provided with color filters can be recognized as a problem. In view of this problem, attention has been focused on what is called a color filter on array (COA) structure, in which a color filter is formed on the active-matrix substrate side.
- As a liquid crystal display device with a COA structure, a reflective or semi-transmissive liquid crystal display device which includes a color filter, a pixel electrode, and a reflective layer on the active-matrix substrate side and in which light entering from the counter substrate side is transmitted through the pixel electrode and the color filter and is reflected by the underlying reflective layer and is visually recognized is disclosed (e.g., see
Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2). - In the case of a reflective display device in which a counter substrate is provided with a color filter, light such as external light is transmitted through the color filter, reflected by a reflective film or the like, and transmitted through the color filter again.
- Also in the case of a reflective display device having a COA structure, light such as external light is transmitted through the color filter, reflected by a reflective film or the like, and transmitted through the color filter again. That is, light such as external light is transmitted through the color filter twice and is then observed by a viewer. This may increase the color purity of reflected light. In the case where external light is relatively weak in a room or the like, reflected light with high color purity is weak, resulting in dark display.
- The color purity of reflected light in a reflective display device can be adjusted by the thickness of a color filter, for example. The color purity can be adjusted also by changing a coloring material, such as a pigment, which is used for the color filter. However, when the thickness of the color filter is large or small, it is difficult to make the thickness uniform all over a substrate surface. In the case where a coloring material used for the color filter is changed, the material change results in increases in development time and cost.
- Another problem is low adhesion between the color filter and a surface over which the color filter is formed. For example, as the color filter, a photosensitive resin film is formed by applying and drying a photosensitive resin solution in which a coloring material is dispersed. Since the coloring material is dispersed, light intensity at the time of light exposure of the photosensitive resin film decreases in a depth direction, which may cause insufficient photocuring and low adhesion at or around the interface between the photosensitive resin film and the surface over which the photosensitive resin film is formed.
- In view of the above problems, an object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a novel display device capable of adjusting color purity. Another object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a novel display device with improved adhesion of a color filter. Another object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a novel display device of which productivity is improved. Another object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a novel display device capable of excellent reflective display. Another object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a novel display device with a COA structure that is capable of excellent reflective display. Another object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a novel display device or the like.
- Note that the descriptions of these objects do not disturb the existence of other objects. Note that in one embodiment of the present invention, there is no need to achieve all the objects. Note that other objects will be apparent from the description of the specification, the drawings, the claims, and the like and other objects can be derived from the description of the specification, the drawings, the claims, and the like.
- One embodiment of the present invention is a display device which includes a pixel region, a transistor formed in the pixel region, a source electrode layer or a drain electrode layer of the transistor, an insulating layer over the source electrode layer or the drain electrode layer, a pixel electrode layer over the insulating layer, and a coloring layer overlapping with the pixel electrode layer and the drain electrode layer. The pixel electrode layer is electrically connected to the transistor. The coloring layer includes at least a first opening and a second opening.
- In the above embodiment, the coloring layer may be formed over a counter substrate, and a substrate provided with the pixel electrode layer and the counter substrate may be aligned with and attached to each other such that the coloring layer overlaps with the pixel electrode layer. In the above embodiment, the pixel electrode layer may function as a reflective electrode layer.
- In the above embodiment, the coloring layer may be a material layer capable of transmitting light in a red wavelength range, a material layer capable of transmitting light in a green wavelength range, or a material layer capable of transmitting light in a blue wavelength range. As another color of the coloring layer, cyan, magenta, yellow, or the like may be used. In the case where three or more kinds of coloring layers are used to achieve full-color display, each coloring layer may have an upper surface shape different from those of the coloring layers of the other colors, and for example, may have a different opening shape. A plurality of coloring layers are not necessarily formed over one substrate, and for example, the counter substrate may be provided with a first coloring layer and the substrate provided with the transistor may be provided with a second coloring layer and a third coloring layer.
- In the above embodiment, the display device may further include a second coloring layer and a third coloring layer. The second coloring layer includes at least a third opening and a fourth opening. Upper surface shapes of the third opening and the fourth opening are different from those of the first opening and the second opening. When an opening in a red coloring layer has a larger area than that of an opening in a blue coloring layer, reflectance can be improved with an NTSC ratio maintained.
- Another embodiment of the present invention is a display device which includes a pixel region, a transistor formed in the pixel region, a reflective electrode layer formed on the same surface as a source electrode layer or a drain electrode layer of the transistor, a first insulating layer over the reflective electrode layer, a coloring layer which is over the first insulating layer and overlaps with the reflective electrode layer, a second insulating layer over the coloring layer, and a pixel electrode layer over the second insulating layer. The coloring layer includes at least a first opening and a second opening. The pixel electrode layer is electrically connected to the transistor through the first opening. The second insulating layer is in contact with the first insulating layer in the second opening.
- Another embodiment of the present invention is a display device which includes a pixel region, a transistor formed in the pixel region, a reflective electrode layer formed on the same surface as a source electrode layer or a drain electrode layer of the transistor, a first insulating layer including an inorganic insulating material over the reflective electrode layer, a coloring layer which is over the first insulating layer and overlaps with the reflective electrode layer, a second insulating layer including an organic insulating material over the coloring layer, and a pixel electrode layer over the second insulating layer. The coloring layer includes at least a first opening and a second opening. The pixel electrode layer is electrically connected to the transistor through the first opening. The second insulating layer is in contact with the first insulating layer in the second opening.
- In each of the above embodiments, it is preferable that the transistor include a gate electrode layer, a gate insulating layer over the gate electrode layer, a semiconductor layer over the gate insulating layer, and the source electrode layer and the drain electrode layer which are in contact with the gate insulating layer and the semiconductor layer.
- In each of the above embodiments, it is preferable that the first insulating layer include a third opening overlapping with the first opening and the pixel electrode layer be electrically connected to the drain electrode layer of the transistor through the first opening and the third opening.
- In each of the above embodiments, it is preferable that the semiconductor layer be an oxide semiconductor layer. The oxide semiconductor layer preferably includes an oxide represented by an In-M-Zn oxide that contains at least indium (In), zinc (Zn), and M (M represents Al, Ga, Ge, Y, Zr, Sn, La, Ce, or Hf).
- In each of the above embodiments, a touch panel may overlap with the pixel region, or the counter substrate may be provided with a circuit having a touch input function.
- Embodiments of the present invention also include an electronic device including the above display device.
- In one embodiment of the present invention, a novel display device capable of adjusting color purity can be provided. In one embodiment of the present invention, a novel display device with improved adhesion of a color filter can be provided. Furthermore, in one embodiment of the present invention, a novel display device of which productivity is improved can be provided. Furthermore, in one embodiment of the present invention, a novel display device capable of excellent reflective display can be provided. Furthermore, in one embodiment of the present invention, a novel display device or the like can be provided.
- Note that the descriptions of these effects do not disturb the existence of other effects. Note that in one embodiment of the present invention, there is no need to achieve all the effects. Note that other effects will be apparent from the description of the specification, the drawings, the claims, and the like and other effects can be derived from the description of the specification, the drawings, the claims, and the like.
- In the accompanying drawings:
-
FIG. 1 illustrates a top view of a display device; -
FIGS. 2A to 2C each illustrate a top view of a coloring layer of a display device: -
FIGS. 3A and 3B illustrate cross-sectional views of a display device; -
FIGS. 4A to 4D are cross-sectional views illustrating a method for manufacturing a display device; -
FIGS. 5A to 5D are cross-sectional views illustrating a method for manufacturing a display device; -
FIGS. 6A to 6C are cross-sectional views illustrating a method for manufacturing a display device: -
FIGS. 7A and 7B illustrate a cross section of a display device and a method for manufacturing the display device; -
FIGS. 8A and 8B are a block diagram of a display device and a circuit diagram of a pixel; -
FIG. 9 illustrates a display module: -
FIGS. 10A to 10H each illustrate an electronic device; -
FIGS. 11A to 11C show optical micrographs in an example: -
FIG. 12 shows a cross-sectional TEM image in an example: -
FIGS. 13A and 13B show cross-sectional TEM images in an example; -
FIGS. 14A to 14C each illustrate a top view of a coloring layer of a display device; -
FIG. 15 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method for manufacturing a display device: -
FIGS. 16A and 16B each illustrate a cross-sectional view of a display device: -
FIGS. 17A and 17B each illustrate a cross-sectional view of a display device: -
FIGS. 18A and 18B each illustrate a cross-sectional view of a display device: -
FIGS. 19A and 19B each illustrate a cross-sectional view of a display device; -
FIGS. 20A and 20B each illustrate a cross-sectional view of a display device; -
FIG. 21 illustrates a top view of a display device: -
FIGS. 22A and 22B each illustrate a top view of a coloring layer of a display device; -
FIGS. 23A and 23B each illustrate a cross-sectional view of a display device: -
FIGS. 24A and 24B are a diagram illustrating a method for measuring reflectance and a graph showing reflectance; -
FIGS. 25A and 25B show a photograph of a display device and characteristics of the display device; -
FIG. 26 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a display device: -
FIGS. 27A and 27B are conceptual diagrams each illustrating an example of a driving method of a display device; and -
FIG. 28 is a graph showing changes in images caused by a refresh operation. - Embodiments will be hereinafter described with reference to drawings. However, the embodiments can be implemented with various modes. It will be readily appreciated by those skilled in the art that modes and details can be changed in various ways without departing from the spirit and scope of the present invention. Therefore, the present invention should not be construed as being limited to the description in the following embodiments.
- In drawings, the size, the layer thickness, or the region is exaggerated for clarity in some cases. Therefore, embodiments of the present invention are not limited to such a scale. Note that drawings are schematic views showing ideal examples, and embodiments of the present invention are not limited to shapes or values shown in the drawings.
- Ordinal numbers such as “first”, “second”, and “third” in this specification are used in order to avoid confusion among components, and the terms do not limit the components numerically.
- Note that in this specification, terms for describing arrangement, such as “over” and “under”, are used for convenience for describing the positional relation between components with reference to drawings. Further, the positional relation between components is changed as appropriate in accordance with a direction in which each component is described. Thus, the positional relation is not limited to that described with a term used in this specification and can be explained with another term as appropriate depending on the situation.
- In this specification and the like, a transistor is an element having at least three terminals of a gate, a drain, and a source. In addition, the transistor has a channel region between a drain (a drain terminal, a drain region, or a drain electrode layer) and a source (a source terminal, a source region, or a source electrode layer), and current can flow through the drain, the channel region, and the source.
- Functions of a “source” and a “drain” are sometimes replaced with each other when a transistor of opposite polarity is used or when the direction of current flowing is changed in circuit operation, for example. Therefore, the terms “source” and “drain” can be replaced with each other in this specification and the like.
- In this specification and the like, the term “electrically connected” includes the case where components are connected through an object having any electric function. There is no particular limitation on an “object having any electric function” as long as electric signals can be transmitted and received between components that are connected through the object. Examples of an “object having any electric function” include a switching element such as a transistor, a resistor, an inductor, a capacitor, and an element with a variety of functions, as well as an electrode and a wiring.
- In this specification and the like, a pixel region includes at least a pixel (corresponding to a display unit that can control the luminance of one color element (e.g., any one of R (red), G (green), and B (blue))). Therefore, in a color display device, the minimum display unit of a color image is composed of three pixels of an R pixel, a G pixel, and a B pixel. Note that the colors of the color elements for displaying color images are not limited to three colors, and may be more than three colors or may include a color other than R, G, and B. For example, a display unit may be composed of four pixels of the R pixel, the G pixel, the B pixel, and a W (white) pixel. Alternatively, a display unit may be composed of a plurality of color elements among R, G, and B as in PenTile layout.
- In this embodiment, a display device of one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to
FIG. 1 ,FIGS. 2A to 2C ,FIGS. 3A and 3B ,FIGS. 4A to 4D .FIGS. 5A to 5D , andFIGS. 6A to 6C . -
FIG. 1 illustrates a top view of an example of a display device of one embodiment of the present invention. In the top view ofFIG. 1 , which shows some pixel regions (three pixels) in the display device, components such as a gate insulating layer are partly omitted to avoid complexity. - In
FIG. 1 , atransistor 150 includes aconductive layer 104 a serving as a gate electrode layer, a gate insulating layer (not illustrated inFIG. 1 ), asemiconductor layer 108 where a channel region is formed, aconductive layer 110 b_1 serving as a source electrode layer, and aconductive layer 10 b_2 serving as a drain electrode layer. Agate line 104 including theconductive layer 104 a serving as the gate electrode layer of thetransistor 150 extends in the horizontal direction, and asource line 110 including theconductive layer 110 b_1 serving as the source electrode layer of thetransistor 150 extends in the vertical direction. Apixel region 120 is formed in a region defined by twogate lines 104 adjacent to each other and twosource lines 110 adjacent to each other. In this manner, thetransistor 150 is formed in thepixel region 120. - Furthermore, a
conductive layer 104 b that is formed in the same step as theconductive layer 104 a serving as a gate electrode layer and theconductive layer 110 b_2 that serves as a drain electrode layer are stacked with an insulating layer that is formed in the same step as the gate insulating layer positioned therebetween. Theconductive layer 104 b, the insulating layer that is formed in the same step as the gate insulating layer, and theconductive layer 110 b_2 form acapacitor 152. - The
transistor 150 is electrically connected to apixel electrode layer 118. Specifically, thepixel electrode layer 118 is electrically connected to theconductive layer 110 b_2 that serves as the drain electrode layer of thetransistor 150, through anopening 134 and anopening 138. - It is preferable that the area of a region where the
source line 110 including theconductive layer 110 b_1 and thegate line 104 including theconductive layer 104 a intersect with each other be small as illustrated inFIG. 1 . Reducing the area of thesource line 110 and the area of thegate line 104 can reduce parasitic capacitance that can be generated between thesource line 110 and thegate line 104. - The
pixel region 120 includes aconductive layer 110 b_3 that is formed in the same step as theconductive layer 110 b_1 serving as the source electrode layer of thetransistor 150 and theconductive layer 110 b_2 serving as the drain electrode layer of thetransistor 150. Note that theconductive layer 110 b_3 has a function of a reflective electrode layer. Theconductive layer 110 b_3 overlaps with acoloring layer 114. Thecoloring layer 114 overlaps with thepixel electrode layer 118. - In the structure in
FIG. 1 , light (mainly external light) that is incident on theconductive layer 110 b_3 is transmitted through at least thepixel electrode layer 118 and thecoloring layer 114 and is reflected by theconductive layer 110 b_3. In other words, the display device in this embodiment performs color display with the use of light reflected by theconductive layer 110 b_3 serving as a reflective electrode layer. Note that theconductive layer 110 b_3 has a function of a capacitor line. Theconductive layer 110 b_3 is connected to that in an adjacent pixel. - The
coloring layer 114 has anopening 134 serving as a first opening and anopening 136 serving as a second opening. Note thatFIG. 1 illustrates a structure in which one pixel is provided with 16openings 136. However, the shape or number ofopenings 136 is not limited to this example. - The
opening 134 serves as an opening for connection between thetransistor 150 and thepixel electrode layer 118. Theopening 136 has a function of adjusting the color purity of thecoloring layer 114. In other words, the color purity of thecoloring layer 114 can be adjusted with the shape or number ofopenings 136. - Such a structure in which the
coloring layer 114 has theopening 136 makes it easy to adjust the color purity of thecoloring layer 114. - Here, an upper surface shape of the
coloring layer 114 in the display device illustrated inFIG. 1 is described more specifically.FIG. 2A is a top view of thecoloring layer 114. Note that inFIG. 2A , components other than thecoloring layer 114 are omitted. In addition,FIG. 2A corresponds to a top view of one pixel. - The
coloring layer 114 illustrated inFIG. 2A has theopening 134 and theopenings 136. InFIG. 2A , a region overlapping with thecoloring layer 114 of an adjacent pixel, here thecoloring layer 114 of an upper adjacent pixel, is denoted by aregion 141, and a region overlapping with thecoloring layer 114 of a lower adjacent pixel is denoted by aregion 142. Such an arrangement in which one pixel overlaps with part of thecoloring layer 114 of an adjacent pixel can suppress light reflection by thegate line 104 or thesource line 110. In other words, when thecoloring layer 114 of an adjacent pixel is stacked, part of thecoloring layer 114 can function as a so-called black matrix (BM). - Note that
FIG. 2A illustrates, as an example, a structure in which the coloring layers 114 of adjacent pixels on both sides separately overlap with thecoloring layer 114; however, the present invention is not limited to this structure. For example, each of the coloring layers 114 of the adjacent pixels may overlap with thecoloring layer 114. Note that in the case where each of the coloring layers 114 of the adjacent pixels overlaps with thecoloring layer 114, surface unevenness in thepixel region 120 or around thepixel region 120 may increase. In view of the flatness in thepixel region 120 or around thepixel region 120, it is preferable that the coloring layers 114 of both the adjacent pixels separately overlap with thecoloring layer 114 as illustrated inFIG. 2A . Alternatively, a black coloring layer serving as a black matrix (BM) may be provided around thepixel region 120. -
FIGS. 2B and 2C illustrate modification examples of thecoloring layer 114 inFIG. 2A . - The
coloring layer 114 inFIG. 2B differs from thecoloring layer 114 inFIG. 2A in the shape of theopening 134 and the shape and arrangement of theopenings 136. Thecoloring layer 114 inFIG. 2C differs from thecoloring layer 114 inFIG. 2A in the shape of theopening 134 and the shape and arrangement of theopenings 136. In this manner, the shapes, numbers, or arrangement of theopening 134 and theopenings 136 of thecoloring layer 114 can be variously changed to adjust the color purity of thecoloring layer 114. Although theopenings 136 illustrated inFIG. 1 andFIGS. 2A to 2C have quadrilateral shapes, the present invention is not limited to these examples and theopenings 136 may have a circular shape, an elliptical shape, or the like. - Note that the shape and arrangement of the
coloring layer 114, theopening 134, theopenings 136, and the like may be changed depending on the color of the pixel. For example, the structure inFIG. 2A may be adopted for an R pixel; the structure inFIG. 2B may be adopted for a G pixel; and the structure inFIG. 2C may be adopted for a B pixel. For a W pixel, a structure not provided with thecoloring layer 114 may be adopted, or theopening 134 or theopenings 136 may be larger than those in pixels of other colors. - Alternatively, a
transmissive region 401 may be provided in one pixel. Alternatively, a semi-transmissive display device including thetransmissive region 401 and areflective region 400 may be formed.FIGS. 14A to 14C illustrate examples in which the upper surface shapes of the coloring layers 114 inFIGS. 2A to 2C are used in semi-transmissive display devices. As illustrated inFIGS. 14A to 14C , it is possible that theopening 136 is not provided in thetransmissive region 401. - Next, cross sections of the display device illustrated in
FIG. 1 are described with reference toFIGS. 3A and 3B . Note thatFIG. 3A is a cross-sectional view corresponding to a cross section taken along dashed-dotted line X1-Y1 inFIG. 1 .FIG. 3B is a cross-sectional view corresponding to a cross section taken along dashed-dotted line X2-Y2 inFIG. 1 . - The display device in
FIG. 3A includes a first substrate 102; the conductive layer 104 a serving as a gate electrode layer over the first substrate 102; the conductive layer 104 b formed in the same step as the conductive layer 104 a; an insulating layer 106 a and an insulating layer 106 b over the first substrate 102 and the conductive layers 104 a and 104 b; the semiconductor layer 108 which is over the insulating layer 106 b and overlaps with the conductive layer 104 a; a conductive layer 110 a_1 serving as a source electrode layer over the semiconductor layer 108 and the insulating layer 106 b; a conductive layer 110 a_2 serving as a drain electrode layer over the semiconductor layer 108 and the insulating layer 106 b; a conductive layer 110 a_3 formed in the same step as the conductive layers 110 a_1 and 110 a_2; the conductive layers 110 b_1, 110 b_2, and 110 b_3 over the conductive layers 110 a_1, 110 a_2, and 110 a_3; a conductive layer 110 c_1 over the conductive layer 110 b_2; an insulating layer 112 serving as a protective insulating film over the insulating layer 106 b, the semiconductor layer 108, and the conductive layers 110 b_1, 110 b_2, 110 b_3, and 110 c_1; the coloring layer 114 having a function of a color filter over the insulating layer 112; an insulating layer 116 having a function of an overcoat layer over the coloring layer 114; the pixel electrode layer 118 over the insulating layer 116; a liquid crystal layer 166 over the pixel electrode layer 118; a conductive layer 164 having a function of a counter electrode over the liquid crystal layer 166; and a second substrate 162 over the conductive layer 164. - Note that the
conductive layer 104 a, the insulating 106 a and 106 b, thelayers semiconductor layer 108, and theconductive layers 110 a_1, 110 a 2, 110 b_1, and 110 b_2 form thetransistor 150. Theconductive layer 104 b, the insulating 106 a and 106 b, and thelayers conductive layers 110 a_3 and 110 b_3 form thecapacitor 152. - Note that a portion of the insulating
106 a and 106 b which overlaps with thelayers conductive layer 104 a serving as a gate electrode layer has a function of a gate insulating layer of thetransistor 150, and a portion thereof which overlaps with theconductive layer 104 b has a function of a dielectric layer of thecapacitor 152. - The insulating
106 a and 106 b are provided with anlayers opening 132 which reaches theconductive layer 104 b, and theconductive layers 110 a_2 and 110 b_2 having a function of a drain electrode layer of thetransistor 150 are connected to theconductive layer 104 b through theopening 132. - Note that the example in which the
opening 132 is provided is described here; however, one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, a structure in which the opening is not provided as illustrated inFIG. 16A may be employed. In that case, theconductive layer 110 b_3 is included in the same island as theconductive layer 110 b_2. Similarly, theconductive layer 110 a_3 is included in the same island as theconductive layer 110 a_2. Theconductive layer 104 b can serve as a capacitor line. Accordingly, in such a case, theconductive layer 104 b is preferably provided so as to extend in a direction substantially parallel to theconductive layer 104 a or thegate line 104. - The
coloring layer 114 is provided with theopening 134 and theopenings 136. In other words, the insulatinglayer 116 over thecoloring layer 114 is in contact with the insulatinglayer 112 in theopening 134. Note that the adhesion of the insulatinglayer 116 to the insulatinglayer 112 is higher than that of thecoloring layer 114. Therefore, when there is a region where the insulatinglayer 116 and the insulatinglayer 112 are in contact with each other, separation of thecoloring layer 114 can be suppressed even in the case where the adhesion between thecoloring layer 114 and the insulatinglayer 112 is not sufficient. - The insulating
layer 112 is preferably formed with an inorganic insulating material. The insulatinglayer 116 is preferably formed with an organic insulating material. When the insulatinglayer 112 is formed with an inorganic insulating material, the insulatinglayer 112 can have favorable characteristics of the interface with thesemiconductor layer 108. When the insulatinglayer 116 is formed with an organic insulating material, thepixel electrode layer 118 formed over the insulatinglayer 116 can have high flatness. - The color purity of the
coloring layer 114 can be adjusted with theopenings 136 provided in thecoloring layer 114. For example, the color purity of thecoloring layer 114 can be adjusted by adjusting the shape of theopenings 136 or the area of theopenings 136. - With such a structure in which the
coloring layer 114 has theopenings 136, a novel display device capable of adjusting color purity can be provided. It addition, a novel display device with improved adhesion of thecoloring layer 114 used as a color filter can be provided. - The insulating
layer 112 is provided with theopening 138. Thepixel electrode layer 118 is connected to theconductive layer 110 c_1 serving as a drain electrode layer of thetransistor 150, through the 134 and 138.openings - The
conductive layer 110 b_3 has a function of a reflective electrode layer. Therefore, a highly reflective conductive layer is preferably used. For example, the highly reflective conductive layer is formed to have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure including any of metals such as aluminum, silver, palladium, and copper or an alloy containing any of these metals as its main component. It is particularly preferable to use a material including aluminum for theconductive layer 110 b_3 in terms of cost, processability, and the like. As theconductive layer 110 c_1, it is preferable to use a highly oxidation-resistant conductive layer. When a highly oxidation-resistant conductive layer is used as theconductive layer 110 c_1, its contact resistance with thepixel electrode layer 118 can be decreased. This can increase reflectance and decrease contact resistance with the pixel electrode layer. - In other words, in the display device illustrated in
FIG. 3A , the highly reflective conductive layer is used in the reflective region, and the highly oxidation-resistant conductive layer is used in a region for contact with the pixel electrode layer; thus, the display device is a novel display device which is capable of excellent reflective display and in which contact failures between a transistor and a pixel electrode layer are reduced. - Note that the
transmissive region 401 may be provided as illustrated inFIG. 16B . - In the display device in
FIG. 3A , theliquid crystal layer 166 is provided between thefirst substrate 102 and thesecond substrate 162 which faces thefirst substrate 102. - The
conductive layer 164 is formed under thesecond substrate 162. Thepixel electrode layer 118, theliquid crystal layer 166, and theconductive layer 164 form aliquid crystal element 170. By application of voltage between thepixel electrode layer 118 and theconductive layer 164, the alignment state in theliquid crystal layer 166 can be controlled. InFIG. 3A , thepixel electrode layer 118 and theconductive layer 164 are in contact with theliquid crystal layer 166; however, one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to this structure. For example, alignment films may be formed in a region where thepixel electrode layer 118 is in contact with theliquid crystal layer 166 and a region where theconductive layer 164 is in contact with theliquid crystal layer 166. - In the display device in
FIG. 3A , theconductive layer 110 b_3 serving as a reflective electrode layer, thecoloring layer 114, and thepixel electrode layer 118 can be formed over thefirst substrate 102; thus, as compared with the case where the coloring layer is formed on thesecond substrate 162 side, high alignment accuracy can be achieved. With this structure, even a liquid crystal display device with high resolution (e.g., 300 ppi or more) can be a reflective liquid crystal display device capable of color display. - Note that the
transistor 150 may be provided with a gate electrode over a channel or under the channel, or may be provided with gate electrodes over and under the channel.FIG. 17A illustrates an example including aconductive layer 118 a which is formed at the same time as thepixel electrode layer 118. Theconductive layer 118 a can serves as a gate electrode of thetransistor 150. Note that theconductive layer 118 a may be connected to theconductive layer 104 a. In that case, the same signal or potential is supplied to theconductive layer 118 a and theconductive layer 104 a. Alternatively, different signals or potentials may be supplied to theconductive layer 118 a and theconductive layer 104 a. Since the conductive layer 18 a is formed at the same time as thepixel electrode layer 118 through the same film formation step and the same etching step, an increase in the number of steps in the process can be prevented. Note that one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, a different conductive layer may be used to form a conductive layer having a function of a gate electrode of thetransistor 150.FIGS. 17B and 18A illustrate examples of such a case. 199 and 199 a may contain a material used for theConductive layers conductive layer 110 c_1. Alternatively, the 199 and 199 a may contain a material similar to the above-described materials that can be used for theconductive layers 104 a, 110 a_1, 110 b_1, and 110 c_1, and the like.conductive layers - Note that as illustrated in
FIG. 18B , aconductive layer 199 b may be provided as a conductive layer which is formed at the same time as theconductive layer 199 a through the same film formation step and the same etching step. This conductive layer can serve as a reflective electrode when formed using a highly reflective material similar to that used for theconductive layer 110 b_3. Alternatively, the conductive layer can form a capacitor when overlapping with theconductive layer 110 b_2. In that case, theconductive layer 199 b may be connected to theconductive layer 104 b. - Note that a
conductive layer 199 c may be provided as a conductive layer which is formed at the same time as theconductive layer 199 a through the same film formation step and the same etching step. Theconductive layer 199 c may be provided in a portion for connection to thepixel electrode layer 118.FIGS. 19A and 19B illustrate examples of such a case. In that case, theconductive layer 199 a may contain a material similar to that of theconductive layer 110 c_1. Note that theconductive layer 199 a is not necessarily provided.FIGS. 20A and 20B illustrate examples of such a case. - Next, the display device illustrated in
FIG. 3B will be described below. - The display device in
FIG. 3B includes thefirst substrate 102; thegate line 104 over thefirst substrate 102; the insulating 106 a and 106 b over thelayers gate line 104;conductive layers 110 a_4 and 110 b_4 over the insulatinglayer 106 b; the insulatinglayer 112 over the insulatinglayer 106 b and theconductive layer 110 b_4; thecoloring layer 114 over the insulatinglayer 112; coloring layers 114 a and 114 b over thecoloring layer 114; the insulatinglayer 116 over the coloring layers 114, 114 a, and 114 b; theliquid crystal layer 166 over the insulatinglayer 116; theconductive layer 164 over theliquid crystal layer 166; and thesecond substrate 162 over theconductive layer 164. Note that theconductive layers 110 a 4 and 110 b 4 serve as thesource line 110. -
FIG. 3B is a cross-sectional view of a region where thegate line 104 and theconductive layers 110 a_4 and 110 b_4 serving as thesource line 110 intersect with each other. - When the coloring layers 114 a and 114 b are formed over the
coloring layer 114 as illustrated inFIG. 3B , surface reflection due to thegate line 104 or theconductive layer 110 b_4 can be suppressed. Note that thecoloring layer 114 a is a coloring layer of an adjacent pixel, here the lower pixel inFIG. 1 . Thecoloring layer 114 b is a coloring layer of an adjacent pixel, here the upper pixel inFIG. 1 . For example, thecoloring layer 114 may be green (G); thecoloring layer 114 a may be blue (B); and thecoloring layer 114 b may be red (R). - With such a structure in which coloring layers are stacked in a region other than at least a reflective region, i.e., a structure in which a coloring layer overlaps with a coloring layer of an adjacent pixel, part of the coloring layers can function as a black matrix.
- Note that other components of the display device in
FIG. 1 andFIGS. 3A and 3B are described in detail in Method for Manufacturing Display Device. - A method for manufacturing the display device illustrated in
FIG. 1 andFIGS. 3A and 3B is described below with reference toFIGS. 4A to 4D ,FIGS. 5A to 5D , andFIGS. 6A to 6C . - First, the
first substrate 102 is prepared. For thefirst substrate 102, a glass material such as aluminosilicate glass, aluminoborosilicate glass, or barium borosilicate glass is used. In the mass production, for thefirst substrate 102, a mother glass with any of the following sizes is preferably used: the 8th generation (2160 mm×2460 mm), the 9th generation (2400 mm×2800 mm, or 2450 mm×3050 mm), the 10th generation (2950 mm×3400 mm), and the like. High process temperature and a long period of process time drastically shrink the mother glass. Thus, in the case where mass production is performed with the use of the mother glass, the heating temperature in the manufacturing process is preferably 600° C. or lower, further preferably 450° C. or lower, still further preferably 350° C. or lower. - Then, a conductive layer is formed over the
first substrate 102 and processed into desired shapes, so that the 104 a and 104 b are formed (seeconductive layers FIG. 4A ). - For the
104 a and 104 b, a metal element selected from aluminum, chromium, copper, tantalum, titanium, molybdenum, and tungsten, an alloy containing any of these metal elements as a component, an alloy containing these metal elements in combination, or the like can be used. In addition, theconductive layers 104 a and 104 b may have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure of two or more layers. For example, a two-layer structure in which a titanium film is stacked over an aluminum film, a two-layer structure in which a titanium film is stacked over a titanium nitride film, a two-layer structure in which a tungsten film is stacked over a titanium nitride film, a two-layer structure in which a tungsten film is stacked over a tantalum nitride film or a tungsten nitride film, a three-layer structure in which a titanium film, an aluminum film, and a titanium film are stacked in this order, and the like can be given. Alternatively, an alloy film or a nitride film in which aluminum and one or more elements selected from titanium, tantalum, tungsten, molybdenum, chromium, neodymium, and scandium are contained may be used. Theconductive layers 104 a and 104 b can be formed by a sputtering method, for example.conductive layers - Next, the insulating
106 a and 106 b are formed over thelayers first substrate 102 and the 104 a and 104 b (seeconductive layers FIG. 4B ). - The insulating
layer 106 a is formed to have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure using, for example, any of a silicon nitride oxide film, a silicon nitride film, an aluminum oxide film, and the like with a PE-CVD apparatus. In the case where the insulatinglayer 106 a has a stacked-layer structure, it is preferable that a silicon nitride film with fewer defects be provided as a first silicon nitride film, and a silicon nitride film from which hydrogen and ammonia are less likely to be released be provided over the first silicon nitride film, as a second silicon nitride film. As a result, hydrogen and nitrogen contained in the insulatinglayer 106 a can be prevented from moving or diffusing into thesemiconductor layer 108 formed later. - The insulating
layer 106 b is formed to have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure using any of a silicon oxide film, a silicon oxynitride film, and the like with a PE-CVD apparatus. - As for the insulating
106 a and 106 b, for example, a 400-nm-thick silicon nitride film can be formed as the insulatinglayers layer 106 a, and then a 50-nm-thick silicon oxynitride film can be formed as the insulatinglayer 106 b. The silicon nitride film and the silicon oxynitride film are preferably formed in succession in a vacuum such that fewer impurities are mixed into the films. Note that portions of the insulating 106 a and 106 b overlapping with thelayers conductive layer 104 a serve as the gate insulating layer of thetransistor 150. In addition, portions of the insulating 106 a and 106 b overlapping with thelayers conductive layer 104 b serve as a dielectric layer of thecapacitor 152. - Note that silicon nitride oxide refers to an insulating material that contains more nitrogen than oxygen, whereas silicon oxynitride refers to an insulating material that contains more oxygen than nitrogen.
- When the gate insulating layer has the above structure, the following effects can be obtained, for example. The silicon nitride film has a higher relative permittivity than a silicon oxide film and needs a larger thickness for an equivalent capacitance. Thus, the physical thickness of the gate insulating layer can be increased. This makes it possible to reduce a decrease in the withstand voltage of the
transistor 150 and furthermore increase the withstand voltage, thereby preventing electrostatic breakdown of thetransistor 150. - Next, a semiconductor layer is formed over the insulating
layer 106 b and processed into a desired shape, so that thesemiconductor layer 108 is formed. Note that thesemiconductor layer 108 is formed in a position overlapping with theconductive layer 104 a (seeFIG. 4C ). - For the
semiconductor layer 108, amorphous silicon, polycrystalline silicon, single crystal silicon, or the like can be used, for example. It is particularly preferable to use an oxide semiconductor for thesemiconductor layer 108. The oxide semiconductor preferably includes an oxide represented by an In-M-Zn oxide that contains at least indium (In), zinc (Zn), and M (M represents Al, Ga, Ge, Y, Zr, Sn, La, Ce, or Hf). Alternatively, both In and Zn are preferably contained. - As the oxide semiconductor, for example, any of the following can be used: indium oxide, tin oxide, zinc oxide, an In—Zn oxide, a Sn—Zn oxide, an Al—Zn oxide, a Zn—Mg oxide, a Sn—Mg oxide, an In—Mg oxide, an In—Ga oxide, an In—Ga—Zn oxide, an In—Al—Zn oxide, an In—Sn—Zn oxide, a Sn—Ga—Zn oxide, an Al—Ga—Zn oxide, a Sn—Al—Zn oxide, an In—Hf—Zn oxide, an In—La—Zn oxide, an In—Ce—Zn oxide, an In—Pr—Zn oxide, an In—Nd—Zn oxide, an In—Sm—Zn oxide, an In—Eu—Zn oxide, an In—Gd—Zn oxide, an In—Tb—Zn oxide, an In—Dy—Zn oxide, an In—Ho—Zn oxide, an In—Er—Zn oxide, an In—Tm—Zn oxide, an In—Yb—Zn oxide, an In—Lu—Zn oxide, an In—Sn—Ga—Zn oxide, an In—Hf—Ga—Zn oxide, an In—Al—Ga—Zn oxide, an In—Sn—Al—Zn oxide, an In—Sn—Hf—Zn oxide, or an In—Hf—Al—Zn oxide.
- Note that, for example, an In—Ga—Zn oxide means an oxide containing In, Ga, and Zn as its main components and there is no particular limitation on the ratio of In to Ga and Zn. The In—Ga—Zn oxide may contain another metal element in addition to In, Ga, and Zn. In this embodiment, an oxide semiconductor is used for the
semiconductor layer 108. - Next, first heat treatment is preferably performed. The first heat treatment may be performed at a temperature higher than or equal to 250° C. and lower than or equal to 650° C., preferably higher than or equal to 300° C. and lower than or equal to 500° C., in an inert gas atmosphere, an atmosphere containing an oxidizing gas at 10 ppm or more, or a reduced pressure state. Alternatively, the first heat treatment may be performed in such a manner that heat treatment is performed in an inert gas atmosphere, and then another heat treatment is performed in an atmosphere containing an oxidizing gas at 10 ppm or more, in order to compensate for desorbed oxygen. By the first heat treatment, the crystallinity of the oxide semiconductor that is used for the
semiconductor layer 108 can be improved, and in addition, impurities such as hydrogen and water can be removed from the insulating 106 a and 106 b and thelayers semiconductor layer 108. The first heat treatment may be performed before processing into thesemiconductor layer 108 having an island shape. - Next, the
opening 132 is formed in a desired region of the insulating 106 a and 106 b (seelayers FIG. 4D ). - Note that the
opening 132 is formed so as to reach theconductive layer 104 b. Theopening 132 can be formed by, for example, wet etching, dry etching, or a combination of wet etching and dry etching. - Next, a
conductive layer 109 a, aconductive layer 109 b, and aconductive layer 109 c are formed over the insulatinglayer 106 b and thesemiconductor layer 108 so as to cover the opening 132 (seeFIG. 5A ). - The
conductive layer 109 a serves as a barrier metal. Theconductive layer 109 a can be formed using any material that provides excellent contact resistance between theconductive layer 109 a and thesemiconductor layer 108. For example, theconductive layer 109 a is formed to have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure including any of metals such as titanium, chromium, nickel, yttrium, zirconium, molybdenum, tantalum, and tungsten or an alloy containing any of these metals as its main component. - The
conductive layer 109 b, which is to serve as part of a reflective electrode layer, is preferably formed using a conductive material with high reflectivity. Further, theconductive layer 109 b serves as part of the source electrode layer and part of the drain electrode layer of the transistor, and therefore is preferably formed using a low-resistance material. For example, theconductive layer 109 b is formed to have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure including any of metals such as aluminum, silver, palladium, and copper or an alloy containing any of these metals as its main component. It is particularly preferable to use a material including aluminum for theconductive layer 109 b in terms of cost, processability, and the like. - The
conductive layer 109 c can be formed using any material that provides excellent contact resistance between theconductive layer 109 c and thepixel electrode layer 118 connected later, and a highly oxidation-resistant conductive layer can be used. Note that the oxidation resistance of the highly oxidation-resistant conductive layer is higher than at least that of a material used for theconductive layer 109 b. For example, theconductive layer 109 c is formed to have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure including any of metals such as titanium, chromium, nickel, yttrium, molybdenum, tantalum, and tungsten, an alloy containing any of these metals as its main component, or a metal nitride containing any of these materials as its main component. It is particularly preferable to use a material including titanium or molybdenum for theconductive layer 109 c, in which case excellent contact resistance between theconductive layer 109 c and a material (e.g., indium tin oxide (ITO)) used for thepixel electrode layer 118 can be provided. - For example, a titanium film or a titanium nitride film is used as the
conductive layer 109 a, an aluminum film or a silver film is used as theconductive layer 109 b, and a titanium film or a titanium nitride film is used as theconductive layer 109 c. Alternatively, a molybdenum film or a molybdenum nitride film is used as theconductive layer 109 a, an aluminum film or a silver film is used as theconductive layer 109 b, and a molybdenum film or a molybdenum nitride film is used as theconductive layer 109 c. - Note that the structures of the
109 a, 109 b, and 109 c are not limited to the above, and a two-layer structure without theconductive layers conductive layer 109 a may be employed. An example of the two-layer structure is a structure in which an aluminum film is used as theconductive layer 109 b and a titanium film is used as theconductive layer 109 c. - The
109 a, 109 b, and 109 c can be formed by a sputtering method, for example.conductive layers - Then, the
conductive layer 109 c is processed into a desired shape, so that theconductive layer 110 c_1 is formed (seeFIG. 5B ). - The conductive layer 110_1 is formed at least in a region to be in contact with the
pixel electrode layer 118 later. A conductive layer different from theconductive layer 110 c_1 may be formed in the same step as theconductive layer 110 c_1. An example of the conductive layer formed in the same step as theconductive layer 110 c_1 is a conductive layer formed over a connection portion or an FPC terminal portion. - Note that when the
conductive layer 110 c_1 is formed, at least a portion of a surface of theconductive layer 109 b is exposed. A region of theconductive layer 109 b where the surface is exposed serves as a reflective electrode layer later. Examples of a method for forming theconductive layer 110 c_1 include a dry etching method, a wet etching method, and plasma treatment. When theconductive layer 110 c_1 is formed, the surface of theconductive layer 109 b may become uneven. The uneven surface can diffusely reflect incident light. This is preferable when theconductive layer 109 b is used as the reflective electrode layer because the reflective electrode layer can have improved reflection efficiency. - Then, the
109 a and 109 b are processed into desired shapes, so that theconductive layers conductive layers 110 a_1, 110 b_1, 110 a_2, and 110 b_2, which serve as the source electrode layer and the drain electrode layer of thetransistor 150, and theconductive layers 110 a_3 and 110 b_3, which serve as the reflective electrode layer and one electrode of thecapacitor 152, are formed. At this stage, thetransistor 150 and thecapacitor 152 are formed (seeFIG. 5C ). - The
conductive layers 110 a_1, 110 b_1, 110 a_2, 110 b_2, 110 a_3, and 110 b_3 are formed in such a manner that a mask is formed over the 109 a and 109 b and regions not covered with the mask are etched. As an etching method for forming theconductive layers conductive layers 110 a_1, 110 b_1, 110 a_2, 110 b_2, 110 a_3, and 110 b_3, a dry etching method or a wet etching method can be used. - When the
conductive layers 110 a_1, 110 b_1, 110 a_2, 110 b_2, 110 a_3, and 110 b_3 are formed, thesemiconductor layer 108 may be partly etched to have a depressed portion. - Note that the cross-sectional structure illustrated in
FIG. 5C may be formed using a half-tone mask (or a gray-tone mask, a phase-shift mask, or the like). In that case, after the step inFIG. 5A , a cross-sectional structure illustrated inFIG. 15 is obtained by etching of the 109 a, 109 b and 109 c. After that, the resist is made slightly smaller by ashing or the like, and then, only part of the conductive layers is etched. As a result, such a cross-sectional structure as illustrated inconductive layers FIG. 5C is obtained. With the use of a half-tone mask (or a gray-tone mask, a phase-shift mask, or the like), the number of steps in the process can be reduced. In that case, theconductive layer 110 b_2 or the like is necessarily provided under theconductive layer 110 c_1. Note that one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, it is possible that theconductive layer 110 b_2 or the like is not provided under theconductive layer 110 c_1 and an insulating film is provided under theconductive layer 110 c_1. Alternatively, for example, after the cross-sectional structure illustrated inFIG. 15 is obtained, the insulatinglayer 112 may be formed thereover without etching of the conductive layers. - Next, the insulating
layer 112 is formed over thesemiconductor layer 108, theconductive layers 110 b_1, 110 b_2, 110 b_3, and 110 c_1, and the insulatinglayer 106 b (seeFIG. 5D ). - For the insulating
layer 112, an inorganic insulating material containing oxygen can be used in order to improve the characteristics of the interface with the oxide semiconductor used for thesemiconductor layer 108. The insulatinglayer 112 can be formed by a PE-CVD method, for example. - As an example of the insulating
layer 112, a silicon oxide film, a silicon oxynitride film, an aluminum oxide film, or the like having a thickness of greater than or equal to 50 nm and less than or equal to 500 nm can be used. In this embodiment, a 450-nm-thick silicon oxynitride film is used as the insulatinglayer 112. - Another insulating layer may be formed over the insulating
layer 112. The insulating layer is formed using a material that can prevent an external impurity such as water, an alkali metal, or an alkaline earth metal from diffusing into the oxide semiconductor used for thesemiconductor layer 108. For example, a silicon nitride film a silicon nitride oxide film, or the like having a thickness of greater than or equal to 50 nm and less than or equal to 500 nm can be used as the insulating layer. - The insulating
layer 112 over theconductive layer 110 b_3 serving as a reflective electrode layer is preferably thin. For example, the thickness of the insulatinglayer 112 over theconductive layer 110 b_3 is preferably greater than or equal to 1 nm and less than or equal to 100 nm, further preferably greater than or equal to 5 nm and less than or equal to 50 nm. Forming the insulatinglayer 112 thin over theconductive layer 110 b_3 can shorten the optical path length between theconductive layer 110 b_3 and thecoloring layer 114. For example, the insulatinglayer 112 over theconductive layer 110 b_3 serving as a reflective electrode layer is thinned in such a manner that, after the formation of the insulatinglayer 112, a mask is formed in a region other than theconductive layer 110 b_3 and the insulatinglayer 112 over theconductive layer 110 b_3 is etched. - Next, the
coloring layer 114 having a desired shape is formed over the insulatinglayer 112. Then, the insulatinglayer 116 is formed so as to cover the coloring layer 114 (seeFIG. 6A ). - The
coloring layer 114 is a coloring layer having a function of transmitting light in a particular wavelength region. For example, a red (R) color filter for transmitting light in a red wavelength range, a green (G) color filter for transmitting light in a green wavelength range, a blue (B) color filter for transmitting light in a blue wavelength range, or the like can be used. Each color filter is formed in a desired position with any of various materials by a printing method, an inkjet method, an etching method using a photolithography technique, or the like. - Note that the
coloring layer 114 has theopening 134 serving as a first opening and theopening 136 serving as a second opening. - For the insulating
layer 116, an organic insulating material such as an acrylic resin can be used. With the insulatinglayer 116, an impurity or the like contained in thecoloring layer 114 can be prevented from diffusing to theliquid crystal layer 166 side, for example. Moreover, the insulatinglayer 116 can planarize unevenness and the like due to thetransistor 150 or thecoloring layer 114. - Note that the insulating
layer 116 preferably has an opening in substantially the same position as theopening 134 in thecoloring layer 114. The opening is formed so as to expose a portion of a surface of the insulatinglayer 112. - Next, the
opening 138 is formed (seeFIG. 6B ). - The
opening 138 is formed in a desired region so as to expose theconductive layer 110 c_1. An example of a formation method of theopening 138 is, but is not limited to, a dry etching method. Alternatively, a wet etching method or a combination of dry etching and wet etching can be employed for formation of theopening 138. - Then, the
pixel electrode layer 118 is formed in a desired region over the insulatinglayer 116 so as to cover theopenings 134 and 138 (seeFIG. 6C ). - A material having the property of transmitting visible light may be used for the
pixel electrode layer 118. For example, a material including one of indium (In), zinc (Zn), and tin (Sn) is preferably used for thepixel electrode layer 118. Thepixel electrode layer 118 can be formed using a light-transmitting conductive material such as indium oxide containing tungsten oxide, indium zinc oxide containing tungsten oxide, indium oxide containing titanium oxide, indium tin oxide containing titanium oxide, indium tin oxide (ITO), indium zinc oxide, or indium tin oxide to which silicon oxide is added. Thepixel electrode layer 118 can be formed by a sputtering method, for example. - Note that the
pixel electrode layer 118 is connected to theconductive layer 110 c_1 through the 134 and 138. In other words, theopenings pixel electrode layer 118 is electrically connected to theconductive layers 110 a_2 and 110 b_2 serving as a drain electrode layer of thetransistor 150. - Through the above process, the structure over the
first substrate 102 can be formed. - Next, the
first substrate 102 and thesecond substrate 162 are attached to each other and theliquid crystal layer 166 is formed. - Note that the
second substrate 162 has theconductive layer 164. Theconductive layer 164, which serves as the other electrode of theliquid crystal element 170, is preferably formed using a light-transmitting material. For theconductive layer 164, a material that can be used for thepixel electrode layer 118 can be used. - The
liquid crystal layer 166 can be formed by a dispenser method (a dropping method), or an injecting method by which a liquid crystal is injected using a capillary phenomenon after thefirst substrate 102 and thesecond substrate 162 are attached to each other. - There is no particular limitation on materials that can be used for the
liquid crystal layer 166, and a nematic liquid crystal material, a cholesteric liquid crystal material, or the like may be used, for example. For theliquid crystal layer 166, a polymer dispersed liquid crystal, a high molecular compound dispersed liquid crystal, a polymer network liquid crystal, or the like may be used. - Through the above process, the display device illustrated in
FIG. 1 andFIGS. 3A and 3B can be manufactured. - Although not illustrated, in this embodiment, an alignment film or an optical film such as a polarizing plate, a circularly polarizing plate (including an elliptically polarizing plate), or a retardation plate (a quarter-wave plate or a half-wave plate) may be provided as appropriate if necessary. Furthermore, the polarizing plate or the circularly polarizing plate may be provided with an anti-reflection film. For example, anti-glare treatment by which reflected light can be diffused by projections and depressions on the surface so as to reduce the glare can be performed.
- Although the case of a reflective display device is described in this embodiment, one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, in an aperture portion of a pixel, a transmissive region may be provided. For example, in one part of an aperture portion of a pixel, a reflective region may be provided, and in another part thereof, a transmissive region may be provided. Therefore, one embodiment of the present invention can also be applied to a semi-transmissive display device.
- Although the example in which the
coloring layer 114 is provided with theopenings 136 is described in this embodiment, one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to this example. Depending on circumstances or conditions, thecoloring layer 114 is not necessarily provided with theopenings 136. For example, it is possible that theopening 136 is not provided in at least one of R, G, and B pixels. Alternatively, in the case where a transmissive region and a reflective region are provided in an aperture portion of a pixel, it is possible that thecoloring layer 114 is provided with theopening 136 in the reflective region and thecoloring layer 114 is not provided with theopening 136 in the transmissive region. - Although the example in which the
coloring layer 114 is provided over thefirst substrate 102 is described in this embodiment, one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to this example. Depending on circumstances or conditions, thecoloring layer 114 is not necessarily provided over thefirst substrate 102. For example, in the case where a W (white) pixel is used in addition to the R, G, and B pixels, it is possible that thecoloring layer 114 is not provided over thefirst substrate 102. - This embodiment can be combined with any of the other embodiments in this specification as appropriate.
- In this embodiment, a modification example of the display device described in
Embodiment 1 is described with reference toFIGS. 7A and 7B . Note that portions having functions similar to those inEmbodiment 1 are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted. -
FIG. 7A is a cross-sectional view corresponding to a cross section taken along dashed-dotted line X1-Y1 inFIG. 1 .FIG. 7B is a cross-sectional view illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing the display device illustrated inFIG. 7A . - The display device in
FIG. 7A includes a first substrate 202; an adhesive layer 203 over the first substrate 202; an insulating layer 205 over the adhesive layer 203; the conductive layer 104 a serving as a gate electrode layer over the insulating layer 205; the conductive layer 104 b formed in the same step as the conductive layer 104 a; the insulating layers 106 a and 106 b over the insulating layer 205 and the conductive layers 104 a and 104 b; the semiconductor layer 108 which is over the insulating layer 106 b and overlaps with the conductive layer 104 a; the conductive layer 110 a_1 serving as a source electrode layer over the semiconductor layer 108 and the insulating layer 106 b; the conductive layer 110 a_2 serving as a drain electrode layer over the semiconductor layer 108 and the insulating layer 106 b; the conductive layer 110 a_3 formed in the same step as the conductive layers 110 a_1 and 110 a_2; the conductive layers 110 b_1, 110 b_2, and 110 b_3 over the conductive layers 110 a_1, 110 a_2, and 110 a_3; the conductive layer 110 c_1 over the conductive layer 110 b_2; the insulating layer 112 serving as a protective insulating film over the insulating layer 106 b, the semiconductor layer 108, and the conductive layers 110 b_1, 110 b_2, 110 b_3, and 110 c_1; the coloring layer 114 having a function of a color filter over the insulating layer 112; the insulating layer 116 having a function of an overcoat layer over the coloring layer 114; the pixel electrode layer 118 over the insulating layer 116; the liquid crystal layer 166 over the pixel electrode layer 118; the conductive layer 164 having a function of a counter electrode over the liquid crystal layer 166; an insulating layer 209 over the conductive layer 164; an adhesive layer 207 over the insulating layer 209; and a second substrate 262 over the adhesive layer 207. - Note that the
conductive layer 104 a, the insulating 106 a and 106 b, thelayers semiconductor layer 108, and theconductive layers 110 a_1, 110 a_2, 110 b_1, and 110 b_2 form thetransistor 150. Theconductive layer 104 b, the insulating 106 a and 106 b, and thelayers conductive layers 110 a_3 and 110 b_3 form thecapacitor 152. - Note that portions of the insulating
106 a and 106 b overlapping with thelayers conductive layer 104 a serving as a gate electrode layer have a function of the gate insulating layer of thetransistor 150. In addition, portions of the insulating 106 a and 106 b overlapping with thelayers conductive layer 104 b have a function of a dielectric layer of thecapacitor 152. - The insulating
106 a and 106 b are provided with thelayers opening 132 which reaches theconductive layer 104 b, and theconductive layers 110 a_2 and 110 b_2 having a function of a drain electrode layer of thetransistor 150 are connected to theconductive layer 104 b through theopening 132. - The
coloring layer 114 is provided with theopening 134 and theopenings 136. In other words, the insulatinglayer 116 over thecoloring layer 114 is in contact with the insulatinglayer 112 in theopening 134. Note that the adhesion of the insulatinglayer 116 to the insulatinglayer 112 is higher than that of thecoloring layer 114. Therefore, when there is a region where the insulatinglayer 116 and the insulatinglayer 112 are in contact with each other, separation of thecoloring layer 114 can be suppressed even in the case where the adhesion between thecoloring layer 114 and the insulatinglayer 112 is not sufficient. - The color purity of the
coloring layer 114 can be adjusted with theopenings 136 provided in thecoloring layer 114. For example, the color purity of thecoloring layer 114 can be adjusted by adjusting the shape of theopenings 136 or the area of theopenings 136. - With such a structure in which the
coloring layer 114 has theopenings 136, a novel display device capable of adjusting color purity can be provided. It addition, a novel display device with improved adhesion of thecoloring layer 114 used as a color filter can be provided. - Note that the display device in
FIG. 7A differs from the display device inFIG. 3A in the following points. In the display device inFIG. 7A , thefirst substrate 202 is provided instead of thefirst substrate 102, and thesecond substrate 262 is provided instead of thesecond substrate 162. In addition, in the display device inFIG. 7A , theadhesive layer 203 and the insulatinglayer 205 are provided between thefirst substrate 202 and the 104 a and 104 b. Furthermore, in the display device inconductive layers FIG. 7A , theadhesive layer 207 and the insulatinglayer 209 are provided between thesecond substrate 262 and theconductive layer 164. - For the
first substrate 202 and thesecond substrate 262, a material having flexibility can be used. It is preferable to use a material having flexibility and toughness for thefirst substrate 202 and thesecond substrate 262. Examples of the material having flexibility include an organic resin and glass thin enough to have flexibility. - An organic resin, which has a specific gravity smaller than that of glass, is preferably used for the
first substrate 202 and thesecond substrate 262, in which case the display device can be more lightweight as compared with the case where glass is used. - Examples of the material having flexibility include glass thin enough to have flexibility, polyester resins such as polyethylene terephthalate (PET) and polyethylene naphthalate (PEN), a polyacrylonitrile resin, a polyimide resin, a polymethyl methacrylate resin, a polycarbonate (PC) resin, a polyethersulfone (PES) resin, a polyamide resin, a cycloolefin resin, a polystyrene resin, a polyamide imide resin, a polyvinyl chloride resin, and a polyether ether ketone (PEEK) resin. In particular, a material whose coefficient of thermal expansion is low is preferable, and for example, a polyamide imide resin, a polyimide resin, or PET can be suitably used. A substrate in which a glass fiber is impregnated with an organic resin or a substrate whose coefficient of thermal expansion is reduced by mixing an organic resin with an inorganic filler can also be used.
- In the case where a fibrous body is contained in the material having flexibility, a high-strength fiber of an organic compound or an inorganic compound is used as the fibrous body. A high-strength fiber is specifically a fiber with a high tensile modulus of elasticity or a fiber with a high Young's modulus. Typical examples of a high-strength fiber include a polyvinyl alcohol based fiber, a polyester based fiber, a polyamide based fiber, a polyethylene based fiber, an aramid based fiber, a polyparaphenylene benzobisoxazole fiber, a glass fiber, and a carbon fiber. As the glass fiber, glass fiber using E glass, S glass, D glass, Q glass, or the like can be used. These fibers may be used in a state of a woven fabric or a nonwoven fabric, and a structure in which this fibrous body is impregnated with a resin and the resin is cured may be used. The structure including the fibrous body and the resin is preferably used, in which case the reliability against bending or breaking due to local pressure can be increased.
- To improve the light extraction efficiency, the refractive index of the material having flexibility is preferably high. For example, a substrate obtained by dispersing an inorganic filler having a high refractive index into an organic resin can have a higher refractive index than the substrate formed of only the organic resin. In particular, an inorganic filler having a particle diameter as small as 40 nm or less is preferable, in which case such a filler can maintain optical transparency.
- The
first substrate 202 and thesecond substrate 262 may have a stacked-layer structure in which a hard coat layer (such as a silicon nitride layer) by which a surface of a display device is protected from damage, a layer (such as an aramid resin layer) which can disperse pressure, or the like is stacked over a surface of any of the above-mentioned materials having flexibility. - As the
203 and 207, various curable adhesives such as a reactive curable adhesive, a thermosetting adhesive, an anaerobic adhesive, and a photo-curable adhesive such as an ultraviolet curable adhesive can be used. Examples of such adhesives include an epoxy resin, an acrylic resin, a silicone resin, a phenol resin, a polyimide resin, an imide resin, a polyvinyl chloride (PVC) resin, a polyvinyl butyral (PVB) resin, and an ethylene vinyl acetate (EVA) resin. In particular, a material with low moisture permeability, such as an epoxy resin, is preferred. Alternatively, a two-component-mixture-type resin may be used. Further alternatively, an adhesive sheet or the like may be used.adhesive layers - The
203 and 207 may include a drying agent in a resin material. As the drying agent, for example, a substance which adsorbs moisture by chemical adsorption, such as an oxide of an alkaline earth metal (e.g., calcium oxide or barium oxide), can be used. Alternatively, a substance that adsorbs moisture by physical adsorption, such as zeolite or silica gel, may be used. The drying agent is preferably included, in which case it can suppress entry of impurities such as moisture into the display device.adhesive layers - For the insulating
205 and 209, an inorganic insulating material can be used, for example. The inorganic insulating material may have a single-layer structure or a multilayer structure of silicon nitride, silicon oxynitride, silicon nitride oxide, aluminum oxide, or the like. The insulatinglayers 205 and 209 have a function of buffer layers.layers - There is no particular limitation on the method for forming the insulating
205 and 209; a sputtering method, an evaporation method, a droplet discharging method (e.g., an ink-jet method), a printing method (e.g., a screen printing method or an off-set printing method), or the like may be used.layers - Here, an example of a method for manufacturing the display device illustrated in
FIG. 7A is described with reference toFIG. 7B . - As illustrated in
FIG. 7B , aseparation layer 211 is formed over thefirst substrate 102. Next, the insulatinglayer 205 is formed over theseparation layer 211. - For the
first substrate 102, any of the materials described inEmbodiment 1 can be used. - The
separation layer 211 can be formed to have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure using an element selected from tungsten, molybdenum, titanium, tantalum, niobium, nickel, cobalt, zirconium, zinc, ruthenium, rhodium, palladium, osmium, iridium, and silicon; an alloy material containing any of the elements; a compound material containing any of the elements; or the like, for example. In the case of a layer containing silicon, a crystal structure of the layer containing silicon may be amorphous, microcrystal, polycrystal, or single crystal. - Note that between the
first substrate 102 and theseparation layer 211, an insulating film such as a silicon oxide film, a silicon oxynitride film, a silicon nitride film, or a silicon nitride oxide film may be formed. The insulating film is preferably formed because it can suppress entry of impurities which can be contained in thefirst substrate 102 to theseparation layer 211 side. - The
separation layer 211 can be formed by a sputtering method, a plasma CVD method, a coating method, a printing method, or the like. Note that a coating method includes a spin coating method, a droplet discharge method, and a dispensing method. - In the case where the
separation layer 211 has a single-layer structure, a layer containing tungsten, molybdenum, or a mixture of tungsten and molybdenum is preferably formed. Alternatively, a layer containing an oxide or an oxynitride of tungsten, a layer containing an oxide or an oxynitride of molybdenum, or a layer containing an oxide or an oxynitride of a mixture of tungsten and molybdenum may be formed. Note that the mixture of tungsten and molybdenum corresponds to an alloy of tungsten and molybdenum, for example. - In the case where the
separation layer 211 is formed to have a stacked-layer structure including a layer containing tungsten and a layer containing an oxide of tungsten, the layer containing an oxide of tungsten may be formed as follows: the layer containing tungsten is formed first and an insulating layer formed of an oxide is formed thereover, so that the layer containing an oxide of tungsten is formed at the interface between the tungsten layer and the insulating layer. Alternatively, the layer containing an oxide of tungsten may be formed by performing thermal oxidation treatment, oxygen plasma treatment, nitrous oxide (N2O) plasma treatment, treatment with a highly oxidizing solution such as ozone water, or the like on the surface of the layer containing tungsten. Plasma treatment or heat treatment may be performed in an atmosphere of oxygen, nitrogen, or nitrous oxide alone, or a mixed gas of any of these gasses and another gas. Surface condition of theseparation layer 211 is changed by the plasma treatment or heat treatment, whereby adhesion between theseparation layer 211 and the insulatinglayer 205 formed later can be controlled. - In this embodiment, a 30-nm-thick tungsten film is formed as the
separation layer 211 by a sputtering method. - The insulating
layer 205 can be formed using any of the above-listed materials. For example, in this embodiment, the insulatinglayer 205 is formed at a temperature of higher than or equal to 250° C. and lower than or equal to 400° C. by a plasma CVD method, whereby the insulatinglayer 205 can be a dense film with low water permeability. Note that the thickness of the insulatinglayer 205 is preferably greater than or equal to 10 nm and less than or equal to 3000 nm, further preferably greater than or equal to 200 nm and less than or equal to 1500 nm. In this embodiment, a 600-nm-thick silicon oxynitride film is formed by a plasma CVD method and then a 200-nm-thick silicon nitride film is formed over the silicon oxynitride by a plasma CVD method. - Next, the
104 a and 104 b are formed over the insulatingconductive layers layer 205. Subsequent steps are similar to those for components inEmbodiment 1; thus, components can be formed with reference to the description inEmbodiment 1. - Next, a material to be an adhesive layer is applied to an element substrate where the
transistor 150, thecapacitor 152, and the like are formed (inFIG. 7B , to the insulatinglayer 116 and the pixel electrode layer 118), and the element substrate is attached to a support substrate with the adhesive layer. Then, separation is caused between theseparation layer 211 and the insulatinglayer 205 over thefirst substrate 102, and the insulatinglayer 205 in an exposed state and thefirst substrate 202 are attached to each other with theadhesive layer 203. - Note that any of a variety of methods can be used as appropriate in the step of causing separation between the
separation layer 211 and the insulatinglayer 205. For example, when a layer including a metal oxide film is formed as theseparation layer 211 on the side in contact with a layer to be separated (inFIG. 7B , the insulatinglayer 205, which may also be referred to as a layer to be separated below), the metal oxide film is embrittled by crystallization, whereby the layer to be separated can be separated from thefirst substrate 102. - Alternatively, when a substrate having high heat resistance is used as the
first substrate 102 and when an amorphous silicon film containing hydrogen is formed as theseparation layer 211 between the substrate having high heat resistance and the layer to be separated, the amorphous silicon film is removed by laser light irradiation or etching, whereby the layer to be separated can be separated from thefirst substrate 102. - Alternatively, after a layer including a metal oxide film is formed as the
separation layer 211 on the side in contact with the layer to be separated, the metal oxide film is embrittled by crystallization, and part of the separation layer is removed by etching using a solution or a fluoride gas such as NF3. BrF3, or ClF3, whereby the separation can be performed at the embrittled metal oxide film. - A method may be used in which a film containing nitrogen, oxygen, hydrogen, or the like (for example, an amorphous silicon film containing hydrogen, an alloy film containing hydrogen, an alloy film containing oxygen, or the like) is used as the
separation layer 211, and theseparation layer 211 is irradiated with laser light to release nitrogen, oxygen, or hydrogen contained in theseparation layer 211 as a gas, thereby promoting separation between the layer to be separated and the substrate. - Further, the separation process can be conducted easily by combination of the above-described separation steps. For example, separation can be performed with physical force (by a machine or the like) after performing laser light irradiation, etching on the separation layer with a gas, a solution, or the like, or mechanical removal with a sharp knife, a scalpel, or the like so that the separation layer and the layer to be separated can be easily separated from each other.
- Separation of the layer to be separated from the
first substrate 102 may be carried out by filling the interface between theseparation layer 211 and the layer to be separated with a liquid. Further, the separation may be conducted while pouring a liquid such as water. In the case where theseparation layer 211 is formed using a tungsten film, it is preferable that the separation be performed while etching the tungsten film using a mixed solution of ammonia water and a hydrogen peroxide solution. - Note that the
separation layer 211 is not necessary in the case where separation at the interface between thefirst substrate 102 and the layer to be separated is possible. For example, glass is used as thefirst substrate 102, an organic resin such as polyimide is formed in contact with the glass, and an insulating film, a transistor, and the like are formed over the organic resin. In this case, heating the organic resin enables the separation at the interface between thefirst substrate 102 and the organic resin. Alternatively, separation at the interface between a metal layer and the organic resin may be performed in the following manner: the metal layer is provided between thefirst substrate 102 and the organic resin and current is made to flow in the metal layer so that the metal layer is heated. - Through the above steps, the
transistor 150, thecapacitor 152, and the like formed over thefirst substrate 102 can be transferred to thefirst substrate 202 having flexibility. - Note that transfer from the
second substrate 162 to thesecond substrate 262 can be performed by a similar method. Note that thesecond substrate 262 is not provided with elements such as thetransistor 150 and thecapacitor 152, therefore, theconductive layer 164 may be formed directly over thesecond substrate 262. In that case, theadhesive layer 207 and the insulatinglayer 209 are not provided. - Next, the
first substrate 202 and thesecond substrate 262 are attached and theliquid crystal layer 166 is injected between thefirst substrate 202 and thesecond substrate 262. Thus, the display device inFIG. 7A can be formed. - Since the
first substrate 202 and thesecond substrate 262 of the material having flexibility are used in the display device described in this embodiment, the display device can be flexible. In the case where the material having flexibility and toughness is used for each of the first and 202 and 262, a display device with high impact resistance that is less likely to be broken can be obtained.second substrates - In the display device in
FIG. 7A , the insulatinglayer 116 and the insulatinglayer 112 are in contact with each other in theopening 134 and theopening 136. Accordingly, the adhesion of thecoloring layer 114 is increased, and separation of thecoloring layer 114 can be suppressed even in a flexible structure. This is an advantageous effect obtained in one embodiment of the present invention. As described above, the display device of one embodiment of the present invention, in which the adhesion of thecoloring layer 114 is increased, is particularly effective in a flexible structure. - Note that a substrate formed using the material having flexibility may be similarly used in other drawings such as
FIGS. 16A and 16B ,FIGS. 17A and 17B ,FIGS. 18A and 18B ,FIGS. 19A and 19B , andFIGS. 20A and 20B . - This embodiment can be combined with any of the other embodiments as appropriate.
- In this embodiment, a display device of one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to
FIGS. 8A and 8B . Note that portions having functions similar to those in 1 and 2 are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.Embodiments - The display device illustrated in
FIG. 8A includes a pixel portion including pixel regions with display elements (hereinafter, the portion is referred to as a pixel portion 302), a circuit portion being provided outside thepixel portion 302 and including a circuit for driving the pixel portion 302 (hereinafter, the portion is referred to as a driver circuit portion 304), circuits each having a function of protecting an element (hereinafter, the circuits are referred to as protection circuit portions 306), and aterminal portion 307. Note that theprotection circuit portions 306 are not necessarily provided. - A part or the whole of the
driver circuit portion 304 is preferably formed over a substrate over which thepixel portion 302 is formed, in which case the number of components and the number of terminals can be reduced. When a part or the whole of thedriver circuit portion 304 is not formed over the substrate over which thepixel portion 302 is formed, the part or the whole of thedriver circuit portion 304 can be mounted by chip-on-glass (COG) or tape automated bonding (TAB). - The
pixel portion 302 includes a plurality of circuits for driving display elements arranged in X rows (X is a natural number of 2 or more) and Y columns (Y is a natural number of 2 or more) (hereinafter, such circuits are referred to as pixel circuits 308). Thedriver circuit portion 304 includes driver circuits such as a circuit for supplying a signal (scan signal) to select a pixel (hereinafter, the circuit is referred to as agate driver 304 a) and a circuit for supplying a signal (data signal) to drive a display element in a pixel (hereinafter, the circuit is referred to as asource driver 304 b). - The
gate driver 304 a includes a shift register or the like. Thegate driver 304 a receives a signal for driving the shift register through theterminal portion 307 and outputs a signal. For example, thegate driver 304 a receives a start pulse signal, a clock signal, or the like and outputs a pulse signal. Thegate driver 304 a has a function of controlling the potentials of wirings supplied with scan signals (hereinafter, such wirings are referred to as gate lines GL_1 to GL_X, and the gate lines may also be referred to as scan lines). Note that a plurality ofgate drivers 304 a may be provided to control the gate lines GL_1 to GL_X separately. Alternatively, thegate driver 304 a has a function of supplying an initialization signal. Without being limited thereto, thegate driver 304 a can supply another signal. - The
source driver 304 b includes a shift register or the like. Thesource driver 304 b receives a signal (video signal) from which a data signal is derived, as well as a signal for driving the shift register, through theterminal portion 307. Thesource driver 304 b has a function of generating a data signal to be written to thepixel circuit 308 which is based on the video signal. In addition, thesource driver 304 b has a function of controlling output of a data signal in response to a pulse signal produced by input of a start pulse signal, a clock signal, or the like. Further, thesource driver 304 b has a function of controlling the potentials of wirings supplied with data signals (hereinafter, such wirings are referred to as source lines DL_1 to DL_Y, and the source lines may also be referred to as data lines). Alternatively, thesource driver 304 b has a function of supplying an initialization signal. Without being limited thereto, thesource driver 304 b can supply another signal. - The
source driver 304 b includes a plurality of analog switches or the like, for example. Thesource driver 304 b can output, as the data signals, signals obtained by time-dividing the video signal by sequentially turning on the plurality of analog switches. Thesource driver 304 b may include a shift register or the like. - A pulse signal and a data signal are input to each of the plurality of
pixel circuits 308 through one of the plurality of gate lines GL supplied with scan signals and one of the plurality of source lines DL supplied with data signals, respectively. Writing and holding of the data signal to and in each of the plurality ofpixel circuits 308 are controlled by thegate driver 304 a. For example, to thepixel circuit 308 in the m-th row and the n-th column (m is a natural number of less than or equal to X, and n is a natural number of less than or equal to Y), a pulse signal is input from thegate driver 304 a through the gate line GL_m, and a data signal is input from thesource driver 304 b through the source line DL_n in accordance with the potential of the gate line GL_m. - The
protection circuit portion 306 shown inFIG. 8A is connected to, for example, the gate line GL between thegate driver 304 a and thepixel circuit 308. Alternatively, theprotection circuit portion 306 is connected to the source line DL between thesource driver 304 b and thepixel circuit 308. Alternatively, theprotection circuit portion 306 can be connected to a wiring between thegate driver 304 a and theterminal portion 307. Alternatively, theprotection circuit portion 306 can be connected to a wiring between thesource driver 304 b and theterminal portion 307. Note that theterminal portion 307 means a portion having terminals for inputting power, control signals, and video signals to the display device from external circuits. - The
protection circuit portion 306 is a circuit that electrically connects a wiring connected to the protection circuit portion to another wiring when a potential out of a certain range is applied to the wiring connected to the protection circuit portion. - As illustrated in
FIG. 8A , theprotection circuit portions 306 are provided for thepixel portion 302 and thedriver circuit portion 304, so that the resistance of the display device to overcurrent generated by electrostatic discharge (ESD) or the like can be improved. Note that the configuration of theprotection circuit portions 306 is not limited to that, and for example, a configuration in which theprotection circuit portions 306 are connected to thegate driver 304 a or a configuration in which theprotection circuit portions 306 are connected to thesource driver 304 b may be employed. Alternatively, theprotection circuit portions 306 may be configured to be connected to theterminal portion 307. - In
FIG. 8A , an example in which thedriver circuit portion 304 includes thegate driver 304 a and thesource driver 304 b is shown; however, the structure is not limited thereto. For example, only thegate driver 304 a may be formed and a separately prepared substrate where a source driver circuit is formed (e.g., a driver circuit substrate formed with a single crystal semiconductor film or a polycrystalline semiconductor film) may be mounted. - Each of the plurality of
pixel circuits 308 inFIG. 8A can have a structure illustrated inFIG. 8B , for example. - The
pixel circuit 308 illustrated inFIG. 8B includes theliquid crystal element 170, thetransistor 150, and thecapacitor 152. Note that theliquid crystal element 170, thetransistor 150, and thecapacitor 152 can be those in the display device inFIGS. 3A and 3B described inEmbodiment 1. - The potential of one of a pair of electrodes of the
liquid crystal element 170 is set in accordance with the specifications of thepixel circuit 308 as appropriate. The alignment state of theliquid crystal element 170 depends on written data. A common potential may be supplied to one of the pair of electrodes of theliquid crystal element 170 included in each of the plurality ofpixel circuits 308. Further, the potential supplied to one of the pair of electrodes of theliquid crystal element 170 in thepixel circuit 308 in one row may be different from the potential supplied to one of the pair of electrodes of theliquid crystal element 170 in thepixel circuit 308 in another row. - As examples of a driving method of the display device including the
liquid crystal element 170, any of the following modes can be given: a TN mode, an STN mode, a VA mode, an axially symmetric aligned micro-cell (ASM) mode, an optically compensated birefringence (OCB) mode, a ferroelectric liquid crystal (FLC) mode, an antiferroelectric liquid crystal (AFLC) mode, an MVA mode, a patterned vertical alignment (PVA) mode, an IPS mode, an FFS mode, a transverse bend alignment (TBA) mode, and the like. Other examples of the driving method of the display device include an electrically controlled birefringence (ECB) mode, a polymer dispersed liquid crystal (PDLC) mode, a polymer network liquid crystal (PNLC) mode, and a guest-host mode. Note that the present invention is not limited to these examples, and various liquid crystal elements and driving methods can be applied to the liquid crystal element and the driving method thereof. - The liquid crystal element may be formed using a liquid crystal composition including liquid crystal exhibiting a blue phase and a chiral material. The liquid crystal exhibiting a blue phase has a short response time of 1 msec or less and is optically isotropic. Therefore, alignment treatment is not necessary and viewing angle dependence is small.
- In the
pixel circuit 308 in the m-th row and the n-th column, one of a source and a drain of thetransistor 150 is electrically connected to the source line DL_n, and the other is electrically connected to the other of the pair of electrodes of theliquid crystal element 170. A gate of thetransistor 150 is electrically connected to the gate line GL_m. Thetransistor 150 has a function of controlling whether to write a data signal by being turned on or off. - One of a pair of electrodes of the
capacitor 152 is electrically connected to a wiring to which a potential is supplied (hereinafter referred to as a potential supply line VL), and the other is electrically connected to the other of the pair of electrodes of theliquid crystal element 170. The potential of the potential supply line VL is set in accordance with the specifications of thepixel circuit 308 as appropriate. Thecapacitor 152 functions as a storage capacitor for storing written data. - For example, in the display device including the
pixel circuit 308 inFIG. 8A , thepixel circuits 308 are sequentially selected row by row by thegate driver 304 a, whereby thetransistors 150 are turned on and a data signal is written. - When the
transistors 150 are turned off, thepixel circuits 308 in which the data has been written are brought into a holding state. This operation is sequentially performed row by row; thus, an image can be displayed. - The structure described in this embodiment can be combined with any of the structures described in the other embodiments as appropriate.
- In this embodiment, a display module and electronic devices that can be formed using a display device of one embodiment of the present invention are described with reference to
FIG. 9 andFIGS. 10A to 10H . - In a
display module 8000 illustrated inFIG. 9 , atouch panel 8004 connected to anFPC 8003, adisplay panel 8006 connected to anFPC 8005, abacklight unit 8007, aframe 8009, a printedboard 8010, and abattery 8011 are provided between anupper cover 8001 and alower cover 8002. - The display device of one embodiment of the present invention can be used for, for example, the
display panel 8006. - The shapes and sizes of the
upper cover 8001 and thelower cover 8002 can be changed as appropriate in accordance with the sizes of thetouch panel 8004 and thedisplay panel 8006. - The
touch panel 8004 can be a resistive touch panel or a capacitive touch panel and can be formed to overlap with thedisplay panel 8006. A counter substrate (sealing substrate) of thedisplay panel 8006 can have a touch panel function. A photosensor may be provided in each pixel of thedisplay panel 8006 to form an optical touch panel. - The
backlight unit 8007 includes alight source 8008. Note that although a structure in which thelight sources 8008 are provided over thebacklight unit 8007 is illustrated inFIG. 9 , one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to this structure. For example, a structure in which thelight source 8008 is provided at an end portion of thebacklight unit 8007 and a light diffusion plate is further provided may be employed. - Note that the
backlight unit 8007 need not be provided in the case of a reflective liquid crystal display device. Thebacklight unit 8007 is provided in the case of a transmissive liquid crystal display device or a semi-transmissive liquid crystal display device, for example. - The
frame 8009 protects thedisplay panel 8006 and also functions as an electromagnetic shield for blocking electromagnetic waves generated by the operation of the printedboard 8010. Theframe 8009 may function as a radiator plate. - The printed
board 8010 is provided with a power supply circuit and a signal processing circuit for outputting a video signal and a clock signal. As a power source for supplying power to the power supply circuit, an external commercial power source or a power source using thebattery 8011 provided separately may be used. Thebattery 8011 can be omitted in the case of using a commercial power source. - The
display module 8000 may be additionally provided with a member such as a polarizing plate, a retardation plate, or a prism sheet. -
FIGS. 10A to 10H illustrate electronic devices. These electronic devices can include ahousing 5000, adisplay portion 5001, aspeaker 5003, anLED lamp 5004, operation keys 5005 (including a power switch or an operation switch), aconnection terminal 5006, a sensor 5007 (a sensor having a function of measuring or sensing force, displacement, position, speed, acceleration, angular velocity, rotational frequency, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemical substance, sound, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, electric power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, gradient, oscillation, odor, or infrared ray), amicrophone 5008, and the like. -
FIG. 10A illustrates a mobile computer that can include aswitch 5009, aninfrared port 5010, and the like in addition to the above components.FIG. 10B illustrates a portable image reproducing device (e.g., a DVD player) that is provided with a memory medium and can include asecond display portion 5002, a memorymedium reading portion 5011, and the like in addition to the above components.FIG. 10C illustrates a goggle-type display that can include thesecond display portion 5002, asupport 5012, anearphone 5013, and the like in addition to the above components. FIG. 10D illustrates a portable game machine that can include the memorymedium reading portion 5011 and the like in addition to the above components.FIG. 10E illustrates a digital camera that has a television reception function and can include anantenna 5014, ashutter button 5015, animage receiving portion 5016, and the like in addition to the above components.FIG. 10F illustrates a portable game machine that can include thesecond display portion 5002, the memorymedium reading portion 5011, and the like in addition to the above components.FIG. 10G illustrates a television receiver that can include a tuner, an image processing portion, and the like in addition to the above components.FIG. 10H illustrates a portable television receiver that can include acharger 5017 capable of transmitting and receiving signals, and the like in addition to the above components. - The electronic devices illustrated in
FIGS. 10A to 10H can have a variety of functions, for example, a function of displaying a variety of data (a still image, a moving image, a text image, and the like) on the display portion, a touch panel function, a function of displaying a calendar, date, time, and the like, a function of controlling a process with a variety of software (programs), a wireless communication function, a function of being connected to a variety of computer networks with a wireless communication function, a function of transmitting and receiving a variety of data with a wireless communication function, a function of reading a program or data stored in a memory medium and displaying the program or data on the display portion, and the like. Further, the electronic device including a plurality of display portions can have a function of displaying image data mainly on one display portion while displaying text data on another display portion, a function of displaying a three-dimensional image by displaying images on a plurality of display portions with a parallax taken into account, or the like. Furthermore, the electronic device including an image receiving portion can have a function of shooting a still image, a function of taking a moving image, a function of automatically or manually correcting a shot image, a function of storing a shot image in a memory medium (an external memory medium or a memory medium incorporated in the camera), a function of displaying a shot image on the display portion, or the like. Note that functions that can be provided for the electronic devices illustrated inFIGS. 10A to 10H are not limited to those described above, and the electronic devices can have a variety of functions. - The electronic devices described in this embodiment each include the display portion for displaying some sort of data.
- The structure described in this embodiment can be combined with any of the structures described in the other embodiments as appropriate.
- In this embodiment, a modification example of the display device described in
Embodiment 1 is described with reference toFIG. 21 ,FIGS. 22A and 22B , andFIGS. 23A and 23B . Note that portions having functions similar to those inEmbodiment 1 are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted. -
FIG. 21 is a top view of an example of a display device of one embodiment of the present invention. In the top view ofFIG. 21 , which shows some pixel regions (three pixels) in the display device, components such as a gate insulating layer are partly omitted to avoid complexity.FIG. 23A is a cross-sectional view corresponding to a cross section taken along dashed-dotted line X6-Y6 inFIG. 21 .FIG. 23B is a cross-sectional view corresponding to a cross section taken along dashed-dotted line X7-Y7 inFIG. 21 . - This embodiment describes an example in which a pixel electrode layer is used as a reflective electrode and a
substrate 162 that is a counter substrate is provided with a coloring layer, aBM 180, and aspacer 181. The position of overlap with openings in the coloring layer and the position of overlap with thespacer 181 are indicated by dotted lines. Thetransistor 150 has the same structure as that inEmbodiment 1 except that a 400-nm-thick tungsten film is used as a conductive layer; thus, detailed description is omitted here. Note that thetransistor 150 has a channel length L of 3 μm and a channel width W of 3 μm. Thetransistor 150 includes a 50-nm-thick In—Ga—Zn oxide (In:Ga:Zn=1:1:1 (at. %)) semiconductor layer formed with a sputtering apparatus. - The
pixel electrode layer 118 electrically connected to thetransistor 150 through theopening 138 overlaps with part of thegate line 104, and has a large reflection area. Note that thetransistor 150 is positioned so as to overlap with theBM 180. As theBM 180, a 200-nm-thick titanium film formed with a sputtering apparatus is used. - This embodiment describes an example in which openings in the coloring layers 114 have different shapes for different colors of pixels, as illustrated in
FIGS. 22A and 22B . -
FIG. 22A illustrates a structure of a B pixel on the counter substrate side. InFIG. 22A , the proportion of the area of thecoloring layer 114 to the area of thepixel region 120 is 74.6%. Note that the area of thecoloring layer 114 is calculated by subtracting the area of theBM 180 from the area of thepixel region 120.FIG. 22B illustrates a structure of each of R and G pixels on the counter substrate side. InFIG. 22B , the proportion of the area of thecoloring layer 114 to the area of thepixel region 120 is 44.4%. When the upper surface shape of thecoloring layer 114 in each of the R and G pixels is different from the upper surface shape of thecoloring layer 114 in the B pixel, and when the area of thecoloring layer 114 in the B pixel is larger than that of thecoloring layer 114 in the R or G pixel, reflectance can be improved with an NTSC ratio maintained. - In each of
FIGS. 22A and 22B , a region overlapping with theopening 138 is indicated by a dashed-dotted line for easy understanding of positional relationship; this does not mean that the structure on the counter substrate side actually has theopening 138. In addition, inFIG. 21 , theopening 136 and thespacer 181 are indicated by dotted lines for easy understanding of positional relationship; only the positions are indicated and this does not mean that the structure on the side of the substrate provided with the transistor has theopening 136 and thespacer 181. - The upper surface shapes of the openings illustrated in
FIGS. 22A and 22B are examples, to which the present invention is not limited, and may be triangular, circular, elliptical, polygonal, or the like or a combination of a plurality of kinds of these shapes. In addition, the total area of the openings in thecoloring layer 114 in the B pixel is at least smaller than that of the openings in thecoloring layer 114 in each of the R and G pixels. - The display device in
FIG. 23A includes the first substrate 102; the conductive layer 104 a serving as a gate electrode layer over the first substrate 102; the conductive layer 104 b formed in the same step as the conductive layer 104 a; the insulating layers 106 a and 106 b over the first substrate 102 and the conductive layers 104 a and 104 b; the semiconductor layer 108 which is over the insulating layer 106 b and overlaps with the conductive layer 104 a; the conductive layer 110 a_1 serving as a source electrode layer over the semiconductor layer 108 and the insulating layer 106 b; the conductive layer 110 a_2 serving as a drain electrode layer over the semiconductor layer 108 and the insulating layer 106 b; the insulating layer 112 serving as a protective insulating film over the semiconductor layer 108 and the conductive layers 110 a_1 and 110 a_2; the insulating layer 116 formed using a photosensitive resin over the insulating layer 112; the pixel electrode layer 118 over the insulating layer 116; the liquid crystal layer 166 over the pixel electrode layer 118; the conductive layer 164 having a function of a counter electrode over the liquid crystal layer 166; the spacer 181; the BM 180; the coloring layer 114 having a function of a color filter; an overcoat layer 182 covering the coloring layer 114; and the second substrate 162 that is a counter substrate over the conductive layer 164. In this case, theovercoat layer 182 is in contact with thesecond substrate 162 that is the counter substrate in theopening 136. - As the
overcoat layer 182, an acrylic based resin film is used, which is formed by applying an acrylic based resin material with a spin coater apparatus and then drying the material in an oven apparatus. As for thecoloring layer 114, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) are used, and green (G), red (R), and blue (B) color filters are formed in this order in desired positions by light exposure and development. Each of the red (R), green (G), and blue (B) color filters is formed so as to have a thickness of 0.8 μm. - Note that the
conductive layer 104 a, the insulating 106 a and 106 b, thelayers semiconductor layer 108, and theconductive layers 110 a_1 and 110 a_2 form thetransistor 150. Theconductive layer 104 b, the insulating 106 a and 106 b, and thelayers conductive layer 110 a_2 form thecapacitor 152. Thecapacitor 152 has a large area and thus has a large capacitance for charge storage. Thus, it is possible to retain the potential of the pixel electrode for a longer time and to apply a driving mode with a reduced refresh rate. Furthermore, a change in voltage applied to the liquid crystal layer can be inhibited for a long time even when the liquid crystal display device is used in the driving mode with a reduced refresh rate. This makes it possible to prevent screen flickers from being perceived by a user more effectively. Thus, the power consumption can be reduced and the display quality can be improved. - An effect of reducing the refresh rate will be described here. Note that the refresh rate refers to the number of times of image writing per second and is also called driving frequency. Such high-speed screen switching that is difficult for the human eye to perceive is considered as a cause of eye strain.
- The eye strain is divided into two categories: nerve strain and muscle strain. The nerve strain is caused by prolonged looking at light emitted from a liquid crystal display device or blinking images. This is because the brightness stimulates and fatigues the retina and nerve of the eye and the brain. The muscle strain is caused by overuse of a ciliary muscle which works for adjusting the focus.
-
FIG. 27A is a schematic diagram illustrating display of a conventional liquid crystal display device. As illustrated inFIG. 27A , for the display of the conventional liquid crystal display device, image rewriting is performed 60 times per second. A prolonged looking at such a screen might stimulate the retina and nerve of the eye and the brain of a user and lead to eye strain. - In this embodiment, a transistor with an extremely low off-state current (e.g., a transistor using an oxide semiconductor) is used as the
transistor 150 in a pixel portion of a liquid crystal display device. In addition, the liquid crystal element has a large-area capacitor. With these components, leakage of electrical charges stored in the capacitor can be inhibited, whereby the luminance of a liquid crystal display device can be kept even at a lower frame frequency. - Thus, for example, the number of times of image writing can be reduced to once every five seconds as shown in
FIG. 27B . The same image can be seen for as long as possible and flickers on a screen perceived by a user can be reduced. This makes it possible to reduce stimuli to the retina and nerve of the eye and the brain of a user, resulting in less nerve strain. - This embodiment makes it possible to provide an eye-friendly liquid crystal display device.
- The refresh operation needs to be performed such that a change of an image caused by the refresh operation is not distinguished by users. The display device according to this embodiment has little change of an image caused by the refresh operation and can perform favorable display.
- The
coloring layer 114 formed on thesecond substrate 162 side is provided with a plurality ofopenings 136. The color purity of thecoloring layer 114 can be adjusted by setting the shape or area of theopenings 136 provided in thecoloring layer 114. With such a structure in which thecoloring layer 114 has theopenings 136, a novel display device capable of adjusting color purity can be provided. - The insulating
layer 112 is provided with theopening 138. Thepixel electrode layer 118 is connected to theconductive layer 110 a_2 serving as a drain electrode layer of thetransistor 150, through theopening 138. For the insulatinglayer 116, a photosensitive resin may be used so that random projections and depressions are formed. In the case where random projections and depressions are formed, thepixel electrode layer 118 is a reflective electrode having random projections and depressions reflecting the random projections and depressions on the surface of the insulatinglayer 116. Thus, viewing angle dependence can be improved. - In this embodiment, a highly reflective conductive layer is used as the
pixel electrode layer 118 so as to serve as a reflective electrode. For example, the highly reflective conductive layer is formed to have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure including any of metals such as aluminum, silver, palladium, and copper or an alloy containing any of these metals as its main component. -
FIG. 23B is a cross-sectional view of a region where thegate line 104 and theconductive layer 110 a_2 serving as thesource line 110 intersect with each other. - In the display device in
FIG. 23B , the distance between thefirst substrate 102 and thesecond substrate 162 which faces thefirst substrate 102 is maintained by thespacer 181. In the case where alignment films are formed, the alignment films may be formed after the spacer is formed by patterning an organic resin film or by forming a columnar structure using a photosensitive resin. - When the
BM 180 is formed as illustrated inFIG. 23B , surface reflection due to thegate line 104 or theconductive layer 110 a_2 can be suppressed. - In this manner, the
BM 180 is preferably formed in a portion other than at least a reflective region. - This embodiment can be freely combined with any of the other embodiments.
- In this example, a display device of one embodiment of the present invention was manufactured and subjected to optical microscope observation and cross-sectional observation. Details of samples manufactured in this example are described below.
- Note that a display device having a structure similar to that of the display device illustrated in
FIG. 1 .FIGS. 2A to 2C , andFIGS. 3A and 3B was manufactured in this example. Thus, portions having functions similar to those inFIG. 1 ,FIGS. 2A to 2C , andFIGS. 3A and 3B are given the same reference numerals. - A method for manufacturing the samples which were observed in this example will be described below.
- As the
first substrate 102, a glass substrate was used. Then, theconductive layers 104 a. 104 b, and 104 c were formed over thefirst substrate 102. A 200-nm-thick tungsten film (W) was formed by a sputtering method for the 104 a, 104 b, and 104 c.conductive layers - Then, the insulating
106 a and 106 b serving as a gate insulating layer were formed over thelayers first substrate 102 and the 104 a, 104 b, and 104 c. A 400-nm-thick silicon nitride film was formed as the insulatingconductive layers layer 106 a, and a 50-nm-thick silicon oxynitride film was formed as the insulatinglayer 106 b. - Note that the silicon nitride film that is the insulating
layer 106 a has a three-layer structure of a first silicon nitride film, a second silicon nitride film, and a third silicon nitride film. - The first silicon nitride film was formed to have a thickness of 50 nm under the following conditions: silane at a flow rate of 200 sccm, nitrogen at a flow rate of 2000 sccm and an ammonia gas at a flow rate of 100 sccm were supplied to a reaction chamber of a plasma CVD apparatus as a source gas, the pressure in the reaction chamber was controlled to 100 Pa, and a power of 2000 W was supplied with the use of a 27.12 MHz high-frequency power source. The second silicon nitride film was formed to have a thickness of 300 nm under the following conditions: silane at a flow rate of 200 sccm, nitrogen at a flow rate of 2000 sccm, and an ammonia gas at a flow rate of 2000 sccm were supplied to the reaction chamber of the plasma CVD apparatus as a source gas, the pressure in the reaction chamber was controlled to 100 Pa, and a power of 2000 W was supplied with the use of a 27.12 MHz high-frequency power source. The third silicon nitride film was formed to have a thickness of 50 nm under the following conditions: silane at a flow rate of 200 sccm and nitrogen at a flow rate of 5000 sccm were supplied to the reaction chamber of the plasma CVD apparatus as a source gas, the pressure in the reaction chamber was controlled to 100 Pa, and a power of 2000 W was supplied with the use of a 27.12 MHz high-frequency power source. Note that the first silicon nitride film, the second silicon nitride film, and the third silicon nitride film were each formed at a substrate temperature of 350° C.
- The silicon oxynitride film formed as the insulating
layer 106 b was formed under the following conditions: silane at a flow rate of 20 sccm and dinitrogen monoxide at a flow rate of 3000 sccm were supplied to the reaction chamber of the plasma CVD apparatus as a source gas, the pressure in the reaction chamber was controlled to 40 Pa, and a power of 100 W was supplied with the use of a 27.12 MHz high-frequency power source. Note that the silicon oxynitride film was formed at a substrate temperature of 350° C. - Next, the
semiconductor layer 108 was formed so as to overlap with theconductive layer 104 a with the insulating 106 a and 106 b provided therebetween. A 35-nm-thick oxide semiconductor film was formed as thelayers semiconductor layer 108 by a sputtering method. - The oxide semiconductor film was formed under the following conditions: a metal oxide sputtering target of In:Ga:Zn=1:1:1 (atomic ratio) was used, oxygen at a flow rate of 100 sccm and argon at a flow rate of 100 sccm were supplied as a sputtering gas to a reaction chamber of a sputtering apparatus, the pressure in the reaction chamber was controlled to 0.6 Pa, and an alternating-current power of 2.5 kW was supplied. Note that the oxide semiconductor film was formed at a substrate temperature of 170° C.
- Next, the
opening 132 was formed in a desired position of the insulating 106 a and 106 b. Note that thelayers opening 132 reaches theconductive layer 104 b. - The
opening 132 was formed using a dry etching apparatus. - Next, a conductive layer was formed over the
semiconductor layer 108 and the insulating 106 a and 106 b. As the conductive layer, a 400-nm-thick aluminum film was formed over a 50-nm-thick tungsten film, and a 100-nm-thick titanium film was formed over the aluminum film.layers - Next, a conductive layer 110_1 was formed by removing a region other than a desired region of the 100-nm-thick titanium film with a dry etching apparatus. Note that the conductive layer 110_1 is a 100-nm-thick titanium film.
- Next, the
conductive layers 110 a_1, 110 a_2, 110 a_3, 110 a_4, 110 b_1, 110 b_2, 110 b_3, and 110 b_4 were formed by processing the 50-nm-thick tungsten film and the 400-nm-thick aluminum film into a desired shape with a dry etching apparatus. Note that theconductive layers 110 a 1, 110 a_2, 10 a_3, and 110 a_4 are each a 50-nm-thick tungsten film. Theconductive layers 110 b_1, 110 b_2, 110 b_3, and 110 b_4 are each a 400-nm-thick aluminum film. - The
conductive layers 110 a_1 and 110 b_1 serve as a source electrode layer of a transistor; theconductive layers 110 a_2 and 110 b_2 serve as a drain electrode layer of the transistor; theconductive layers 110 a_3 and 110 b_3 serve as a reflective electrode layer; and theconductive layers 110 a_4 and 110 b_4 serve as part of a source line. - Next, the insulating
layer 112 was formed so as to cover thesemiconductor layer 108 and theconductive layers 110 b_1, 110 b_2, 110 b_3, and 110 c_1. - The insulating
layer 112 was formed to have a three-layer structure of a first oxide insulating film, a second oxide insulating film, and a nitride insulating film. - A 50-nm-thick silicon oxynitride film was formed as the first oxide insulating film. A 400-nm-thick silicon oxynitride film was formed as the second oxide insulating film. Note that the first oxide insulating film and the second oxide insulating film were successively formed with a plasma CVD apparatus in vacuum without exposure to the air. Since the first oxide insulating film and the second oxide insulating film were formed using the same kind of material, the interface between these films cannot be clearly defined in some cases.
- The first oxide insulating film was formed by a plasma CVD method under the following conditions: silane at a flow rate of 30 sccm and dinitrogen monoxide at a flow rate of 4000 sccm were used as a source gas, the pressure in the reaction chamber was 40 Pa, the substrate temperature was 220° C., and a high-frequency power of 150 W was supplied to parallel-plate electrodes.
- The second oxide insulating film was formed by a plasma CVD method under the following conditions: silane at a flow rate of 160 sccm and dinitrogen monoxide at a flow rate of 4000 sccm were used as a source gas, the pressure in the reaction chamber was 200 Pa, the substrate temperature was 220° C., and a high-frequency power of 1500 W was supplied to the parallel-plate electrodes. Under the above conditions, it is possible to form a silicon oxynitride film containing oxygen at a higher proportion than oxygen in the stoichiometric composition and from which part of oxygen is released by heating.
- Next, heat treatment was performed to release water, nitrogen, hydrogen, and the like from the first oxide insulating film and the second oxide insulating film and supply part of oxygen contained in the second oxide insulating film to the oxide semiconductor film used as the
semiconductor layer 108. Here, the heat treatment was performed at 350° C. in a mixed atmosphere of nitrogen and oxygen for one hour. - Then, a 100-nm-thick nitride insulating film was formed over the second oxide insulating film. A 100-nm-thick silicon nitride film was formed as the nitride insulating film. The nitride insulating film was formed by a plasma CVD method under the following conditions: silane at a flow rate of 50 sccm, nitrogen at a flow rate of 5000 sccm, and an ammonia gas at a flow rate of 100 sccm were used as a source gas, the pressure in the reaction chamber was 100 Pa, the substrate temperature was 350° C., and a high-frequency power of 1000 W was supplied to the parallel-plate electrodes.
- Next, the
coloring layer 114 was formed in a desired region over the insulatinglayer 112. - As the
coloring layer 114, a photosensitive resin film was formed by applying a photosensitive resin solution in which a coloring material was dispersed, with a spin coater apparatus and then drying the solution in an oven apparatus. The photosensitive resin film serves as a so-called color filter. Note that in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) are used, and green (G), red (R), and blue (B) color filters were formed in this order in desired positions by light exposure and development. Each of the red (R), green (G), and blue (B) color filters was formed so as to have a thickness of 0.8 μm. Thecoloring layer 114 was formed such that theopening 134 and theopening 136 were provided for each of the above colors. - Next, the insulating
layer 116 having a function of an overcoat was formed over the insulatinglayer 112 and thecoloring layer 114. Note that as the insulatinglayer 116, an acrylic based resin film was formed by applying an acrylic based resin material with a spin coater apparatus and then drying the material in an oven apparatus. The insulatinglayer 116 was formed so as to have a thickness of 2.5 μm. In addition, the insulatinglayer 116 was formed such that an opening is provided inside theopening 134 in thecoloring layer 114. - Next, the
opening 138 was formed in the insulatinglayer 112 in a position overlapping theopening 134. Theopening 138 was formed so as to reach theconductive layer 110 c_1. Note that theopening 138 was formed using a dry etching apparatus. - Next, the
pixel electrode layer 118 was formed over the insulatinglayer 116 so as to cover theopening 138. A 100-nm-thick conductive film of an indium oxide-tin oxide-silicon oxide compound (ITO-SiO2, hereinafter ITSO) was formed as thepixel electrode layer 118 by a sputtering method. Note that the composition of a target used for forming the conductive film was In2O3:SnO2:SiO2=85:10:5 [wt %]. - Through these steps, elements were formed over the
first substrate 102. These samples were subjected to optical microscope observation. - Note that in this example, in order to observe the elements formed over the
first substrate 102, theliquid crystal layer 166, theconductive layer 164, and thesecond substrate 162 were not formed over the insulatinglayer 116 and thepixel electrode layer 118. -
FIGS. 11A to 11C show optical micrographs of the samples manufactured in this example. Note that the optical micrographs shown inFIGS. 11A to 11C are reflected bright-field images. - In addition,
FIGS. 11A to 11C are optical micrographs of the samples with different shapes and arrangements of the 134 and 136 in the coloring layers 114 as shown inopenings FIGS. 2A to 2C inEmbodiment 1. Note that the shapes and arrangement of the 134 and 136 in the coloring layers 114 were changed by changing the shape of a light exposure mask.openings - As shown in
FIGS. 11A to 11C , thecoloring layer 114 with the 134 and 136 of any of the shapes was not separated, and these shapes are found favorable.openings - In addition, favorable color purity was visually observed from all the samples in
FIGS. 11A to 11C . -
FIGS. 11A to 11C each show a top view of roughly three pixels. In each ofFIGS. 11A to 11C , an upper portion is a pixel region in which a red (R) color filter is used as thecoloring layer 114; a middle portion is a pixel region in which a green (G) color filter is used as thecoloring layer 114; and a lower portion is a pixel region in which a blue (B) color filter is used as thecoloring layer 114. - Note that the proportion of the area of the
coloring layer 114 inFIG. 11A to the area of theconductive layer 110 b_3 used as a reflective electrode layer in one pixel is 76%. The proportion of the area of thecoloring layer 114 inFIG. 11B to the area of theconductive layer 110 b_3 used as a reflective electrode layer in one pixel is 63%. The proportion of the area of thecoloring layer 114 inFIG. 11C to the area of theconductive layer 110 b_3 used as a reflective electrode layer in one pixel is 41%. Thus, the proportion of the area of thecoloring layer 114 can be easily changed by changing the shape and arrangement of theopenings 136 in thecoloring layer 114. - Next, results of cross-sectional observation of the samples manufactured in this example are described with reference to
FIG. 12 andFIGS. 13A and 13B . Note that a transmission electron microscope (TEM) was used for the cross-sectional observation.FIG. 12 shows two TEM images partly overlapping with each other. InFIG. 12 andFIGS. 13A and 13B , brightness, contrast, and the like are adjusted to clearly show interfaces and the like. - Note that
FIG. 12 shows a result of a cross section taken along dashed-dotted line X3-Y3 inFIG. 11A .FIG. 13A shows a result of a cross section taken along dashed-dotted line X4-Y4 inFIG. 11A .FIG. 13B shows a result of a cross section taken along dashed-dotted line X5-Y5 inFIG. 11A . - Note that in
FIG. 12 andFIGS. 13A and 13B , Sub. denotes thefirst substrate 102. GI denotes the insulating 106 a and 106 b serving as a gate insulating layer. SiON denotes the silicon oxynitride film used as the insulatinglayers layer 112. SiN denotes the silicon nitride film used as the insulatinglayer 112. W denotes the tungsten films used as the 104 a, 104 b, 104 c, 110 a_1, 110 a_2, 110 a_3, and 110 a_4. Al denotes the aluminum films used as theconductive layers conductive layers 110 b_1, 110 b_2, 110 b_3, and 110 b_4. Ti denotes the titanium film used as theconductive layer 110 c_1. IGZO denotes the oxide semiconductor film used as thesemiconductor layer 108. CF(R) denotes thecoloring layer 114 for red. CF(G) denotes thecoloring layer 114 for green. CF(B) denotes thecoloring layer 114 for blue. OC denotes the acrylic based resin film used as the insulatinglayer 116 having a function of an overcoat. ITSO denotes the indium oxide-tin oxide-silicon oxide compound film used as thepixel electrode layer 118. Pt denotes a platinum coating used as a conductive film for cross-sectional observation. C denotes a carbon coating used as a conductive film for cross-sectional observation. - The results shown in the TEM images in
FIG. 12 andFIGS. 13A and 13B confirm that the display device of this example has a favorable cross-sectional shape. As can be seen from the result shown in the TEM image inFIG. 13A , in the display device of this example, the color filter CF(G) and the color filter CF(R) each used as thecoloring layer 114 are stacked over the gate line, the source line, or a region where the gate line intersects with the source line, which is other than a reflective region. In addition, in the display device of this example, the color filter CF(R) and the color filter CF(B) each used as thecoloring layer 114 are stacked over the gate line, the source line, or a region where the gate line intersects with the source line, which is other than a reflective region. - As can be seen from the result shown in the TEM image in
FIG. 13B , the display device of this example has a structure in which the color filter CF(G) used as thecoloring layer 114 has an opening, and through the opening, the silicon nitride film (SiN) used as the insulatinglayer 112 is in contact with the acrylic based resin film used as the insulatinglayer 116 serving as an overcoat (OC). Thus, it is confirmed that the display device of this example has a favorable cross-sectional shape with improved adhesion of thecoloring layer 114 and with no film separation or the like. - The structure described above in this example can be combined with any of the structures described in the other embodiments as appropriate.
- In this example, a display device of one embodiment of the present invention was manufactured, a pixel region where an image was displayed was photographed, and its reflectance was measured. Details of samples manufactured in this example are described below.
- Note that the display device described in Embodiment 5 and illustrated in
FIG. 21 ,FIGS. 22A and 22B , andFIGS. 23A and 23B was manufactured in this example. In addition, a display device in which all the coloring layers in R, G, and B pixels had the same shape was manufactured. The display device in this example is the same as the display device illustrated inFIG. 1 ,FIGS. 2A to 2C , andFIGS. 3A and 3B , except that openings in coloring layers for different colors have partly varying shapes, the coloring layers are formed over a counter substrate, and a pixel electrode is used as a reflective electrode, for example. Thus, portions having functions similar to those inFIG. 1 ,FIGS. 2A to 2C , andFIGS. 3A and 3B are given the same reference numerals. - Two types of display panels which are the manufactured samples were subjected to reflectance measurement using a measurement apparatus (an LCD evaluation apparatus (product name: LCD-7200)) such that a detector was positioned over the center of the display panel so as to be perpendicular to the display panel surface and the center of the panel was irradiated with light from a light source at an angle in the range from 15° to 70°, as illustrated in
FIG. 24A .FIG. 24B shows the results. - The upper curve in
FIG. 24B represents data obtained from the display device described in Embodiment 5, and the lower curve represents data obtained from the display device in which the coloring layers in the R. G, and B pixels have the same shape that is illustrated inFIG. 22A . -
FIG. 25A shows a photograph of display by the display device described in Embodiment 5. -
FIG. 25B shows a table of characteristics of the two types of display devices. InFIG. 25B , the display device described in Embodiment 5 is referred to as high reflective LCD because of its high reflectance, and the other display device is referred to as high color gamut LCD. - These panels can further be provided with a touch panel so as to be a display device capable of touch input.
FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram of a configuration example of a display device including a touch panel. A display device illustrated inFIG. 26 includes the pixel electrode layers 118 over thesubstrate 102; the coloring layers 114 overlapping with the pixel electrode layers 118; theBM 180 between the coloring layers 114 for different colors; thesubstrate 162; a liquid crystal between thesubstrate 102 and thesubstrate 162; anoptical film 183 over thesubstrate 162; atouch panel 184; and apolarizing film 185. Note that transistors electrically connected to the pixel electrode layers 118 formed over thesubstrate 102 are not illustrated inFIG. 26 . - Note that the data in
FIG. 24B andFIGS. 25A and 25B were obtained before a touch panel is provided. - These data indicate that a reflective liquid crystal display device capable of high-resolution display can be obtained.
- Furthermore, these display panels include capacitors with a large capacitance. Thus, it is possible to retain the potential of the pixel electrode for a longer time and to apply a driving mode with a reduced refresh rate. Moreover, a change in voltage applied to the liquid crystal layer can be inhibited for a long time even when the liquid crystal display device is used in the driving mode with a reduced refresh rate. This makes it possible to prevent screen flickers from being perceived by a user more effectively. Thus, the power consumption can be reduced and the display quality can be improved.
-
FIG. 28 shows results of measuring changes in images caused by a refresh operation in the display device of this example. As shown inFIG. 28 , little change is caused in images by the refresh operation in any of white display, gray display, and black display. - The display device of this example can be used in a driving mode with a reduced refresh rate of 1 Hz or less and can be an eye-friendly reflective liquid crystal display device. The display device of this example can also be a low-power-consumption reflective liquid crystal display device.
- This application is based on Japanese Patent Application serial no. 2013-216904 filed with Japan Patent Office on Oct. 18, 2013 and Japanese Patent Application serial no. 2014-005432 filed with Japan Patent Office on Jan. 15, 2014, the entire contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference.
Claims (7)
1. A display device comprising:
a first substrate;
a transistor over the first substrate;
an electrode layer electrically connected to the transistor;
a first insulating layer over the electrode layer;
a pixel electrode layer over the first insulating layer;
a second insulating layer over the pixel electrode layer;
a first coloring layer over the second insulating layer, the first coloring layer overlapping with the electrode layer and the pixel electrode layer; and
a second substrate over the first coloring layer,
wherein the first coloring layer includes a first opening, and
wherein the second insulating layer is in contact with the second substrate in the first opening.
2. The display device according to claim 1 further comprising a second coloring layer,
wherein the second coloring layer includes a second opening, and
wherein an upper surface shape of the second opening is different from an upper surface shape of the first opening.
3. The display device according to claim 1 ,
wherein the pixel electrode layer is a reflective electrode layer.
4. The display device according to claim 1 ,
wherein the transistor comprises a gate electrode layer, a gate insulating layer and a semiconductor layer, the gate electrode layer overlapping with the semiconductor layer,
wherein the gate insulating layer is provided between the gate electrode layer and the semiconductor layer, and
wherein a source electrode layer and a drain electrode layer are in contact with the gate insulating layer and the semiconductor layer.
5. The display device according to claim 4 ,
wherein the semiconductor layer comprises an oxide semiconductor.
6. The display device according to claim 5 ,
wherein the oxide semiconductor includes an oxide represented by an In-M-Zn oxide containing at least indium (In), zinc (Zn), and M, and
wherein M represents Al, Ga, Ge, Y, Zr, Sn, La, Ce, or Hf.
7. An electronic device comprising the display device according to claim 1 .
Priority Applications (1)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| US15/407,686 US20170123251A1 (en) | 2013-10-18 | 2017-01-17 | Display device and electronic device |
Applications Claiming Priority (6)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| JP2013216904 | 2013-10-18 | ||
| JP2013-216904 | 2013-10-18 | ||
| JP2014005432 | 2014-01-15 | ||
| JP2014-005432 | 2014-01-15 | ||
| US14/516,103 US9553114B2 (en) | 2013-10-18 | 2014-10-16 | Display device and electronic device with a color filter |
| US15/407,686 US20170123251A1 (en) | 2013-10-18 | 2017-01-17 | Display device and electronic device |
Related Parent Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| US14/516,103 Division US9553114B2 (en) | 2013-10-18 | 2014-10-16 | Display device and electronic device with a color filter |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| US20170123251A1 true US20170123251A1 (en) | 2017-05-04 |
Family
ID=52825400
Family Applications (2)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| US14/516,103 Active US9553114B2 (en) | 2013-10-18 | 2014-10-16 | Display device and electronic device with a color filter |
| US15/407,686 Abandoned US20170123251A1 (en) | 2013-10-18 | 2017-01-17 | Display device and electronic device |
Family Applications Before (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| US14/516,103 Active US9553114B2 (en) | 2013-10-18 | 2014-10-16 | Display device and electronic device with a color filter |
Country Status (5)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| US (2) | US9553114B2 (en) |
| JP (2) | JP2015156012A (en) |
| KR (1) | KR20150045365A (en) |
| CN (1) | CN104570522A (en) |
| TW (1) | TWI642170B (en) |
Cited By (66)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US20170245054A1 (en) * | 2016-02-22 | 2017-08-24 | Sonos, Inc. | Sensor on Moving Component of Transducer |
| US10181323B2 (en) | 2016-10-19 | 2019-01-15 | Sonos, Inc. | Arbitration-based voice recognition |
| US10212512B2 (en) | 2016-02-22 | 2019-02-19 | Sonos, Inc. | Default playback devices |
| US10297256B2 (en) | 2016-07-15 | 2019-05-21 | Sonos, Inc. | Voice detection by multiple devices |
| US10313812B2 (en) | 2016-09-30 | 2019-06-04 | Sonos, Inc. | Orientation-based playback device microphone selection |
| US10332537B2 (en) | 2016-06-09 | 2019-06-25 | Sonos, Inc. | Dynamic player selection for audio signal processing |
| US10354658B2 (en) | 2016-08-05 | 2019-07-16 | Sonos, Inc. | Voice control of playback device using voice assistant service(s) |
| US10365889B2 (en) | 2016-02-22 | 2019-07-30 | Sonos, Inc. | Metadata exchange involving a networked playback system and a networked microphone system |
| US10409549B2 (en) | 2016-02-22 | 2019-09-10 | Sonos, Inc. | Audio response playback |
| US10445057B2 (en) | 2017-09-08 | 2019-10-15 | Sonos, Inc. | Dynamic computation of system response volume |
| US10466962B2 (en) | 2017-09-29 | 2019-11-05 | Sonos, Inc. | Media playback system with voice assistance |
| US10511904B2 (en) | 2017-09-28 | 2019-12-17 | Sonos, Inc. | Three-dimensional beam forming with a microphone array |
| US10573321B1 (en) | 2018-09-25 | 2020-02-25 | Sonos, Inc. | Voice detection optimization based on selected voice assistant service |
| US10587430B1 (en) | 2018-09-14 | 2020-03-10 | Sonos, Inc. | Networked devices, systems, and methods for associating playback devices based on sound codes |
| US10586540B1 (en) | 2019-06-12 | 2020-03-10 | Sonos, Inc. | Network microphone device with command keyword conditioning |
| US10593331B2 (en) | 2016-07-15 | 2020-03-17 | Sonos, Inc. | Contextualization of voice inputs |
| US10602268B1 (en) | 2018-12-20 | 2020-03-24 | Sonos, Inc. | Optimization of network microphone devices using noise classification |
| US10621981B2 (en) | 2017-09-28 | 2020-04-14 | Sonos, Inc. | Tone interference cancellation |
| US10692518B2 (en) | 2018-09-29 | 2020-06-23 | Sonos, Inc. | Linear filtering for noise-suppressed speech detection via multiple network microphone devices |
| US10740065B2 (en) | 2016-02-22 | 2020-08-11 | Sonos, Inc. | Voice controlled media playback system |
| US10797667B2 (en) | 2018-08-28 | 2020-10-06 | Sonos, Inc. | Audio notifications |
| US10818290B2 (en) | 2017-12-11 | 2020-10-27 | Sonos, Inc. | Home graph |
| US10847178B2 (en) | 2018-05-18 | 2020-11-24 | Sonos, Inc. | Linear filtering for noise-suppressed speech detection |
| US10847143B2 (en) | 2016-02-22 | 2020-11-24 | Sonos, Inc. | Voice control of a media playback system |
| US10867604B2 (en) | 2019-02-08 | 2020-12-15 | Sonos, Inc. | Devices, systems, and methods for distributed voice processing |
| US10871943B1 (en) | 2019-07-31 | 2020-12-22 | Sonos, Inc. | Noise classification for event detection |
| US10880650B2 (en) | 2017-12-10 | 2020-12-29 | Sonos, Inc. | Network microphone devices with automatic do not disturb actuation capabilities |
| US10878811B2 (en) | 2018-09-14 | 2020-12-29 | Sonos, Inc. | Networked devices, systems, and methods for intelligently deactivating wake-word engines |
| US10891932B2 (en) | 2017-09-28 | 2021-01-12 | Sonos, Inc. | Multi-channel acoustic echo cancellation |
| US10959029B2 (en) | 2018-05-25 | 2021-03-23 | Sonos, Inc. | Determining and adapting to changes in microphone performance of playback devices |
| US11017789B2 (en) | 2017-09-27 | 2021-05-25 | Sonos, Inc. | Robust Short-Time Fourier Transform acoustic echo cancellation during audio playback |
| US11024331B2 (en) | 2018-09-21 | 2021-06-01 | Sonos, Inc. | Voice detection optimization using sound metadata |
| US11076035B2 (en) | 2018-08-28 | 2021-07-27 | Sonos, Inc. | Do not disturb feature for audio notifications |
| US11100923B2 (en) | 2018-09-28 | 2021-08-24 | Sonos, Inc. | Systems and methods for selective wake word detection using neural network models |
| US11120794B2 (en) | 2019-05-03 | 2021-09-14 | Sonos, Inc. | Voice assistant persistence across multiple network microphone devices |
| US11132989B2 (en) | 2018-12-13 | 2021-09-28 | Sonos, Inc. | Networked microphone devices, systems, and methods of localized arbitration |
| US11138975B2 (en) | 2019-07-31 | 2021-10-05 | Sonos, Inc. | Locally distributed keyword detection |
| US11138969B2 (en) | 2019-07-31 | 2021-10-05 | Sonos, Inc. | Locally distributed keyword detection |
| US11175880B2 (en) | 2018-05-10 | 2021-11-16 | Sonos, Inc. | Systems and methods for voice-assisted media content selection |
| US11183183B2 (en) | 2018-12-07 | 2021-11-23 | Sonos, Inc. | Systems and methods of operating media playback systems having multiple voice assistant services |
| US11183181B2 (en) | 2017-03-27 | 2021-11-23 | Sonos, Inc. | Systems and methods of multiple voice services |
| US11189286B2 (en) | 2019-10-22 | 2021-11-30 | Sonos, Inc. | VAS toggle based on device orientation |
| US11197096B2 (en) | 2018-06-28 | 2021-12-07 | Sonos, Inc. | Systems and methods for associating playback devices with voice assistant services |
| US11200894B2 (en) | 2019-06-12 | 2021-12-14 | Sonos, Inc. | Network microphone device with command keyword eventing |
| US11200900B2 (en) | 2019-12-20 | 2021-12-14 | Sonos, Inc. | Offline voice control |
| US11200889B2 (en) | 2018-11-15 | 2021-12-14 | Sonos, Inc. | Dilated convolutions and gating for efficient keyword spotting |
| US11308958B2 (en) | 2020-02-07 | 2022-04-19 | Sonos, Inc. | Localized wakeword verification |
| US11308962B2 (en) | 2020-05-20 | 2022-04-19 | Sonos, Inc. | Input detection windowing |
| US11315556B2 (en) | 2019-02-08 | 2022-04-26 | Sonos, Inc. | Devices, systems, and methods for distributed voice processing by transmitting sound data associated with a wake word to an appropriate device for identification |
| US11343614B2 (en) | 2018-01-31 | 2022-05-24 | Sonos, Inc. | Device designation of playback and network microphone device arrangements |
| US11361756B2 (en) | 2019-06-12 | 2022-06-14 | Sonos, Inc. | Conditional wake word eventing based on environment |
| US11380322B2 (en) | 2017-08-07 | 2022-07-05 | Sonos, Inc. | Wake-word detection suppression |
| US11405430B2 (en) | 2016-02-22 | 2022-08-02 | Sonos, Inc. | Networked microphone device control |
| US11482224B2 (en) | 2020-05-20 | 2022-10-25 | Sonos, Inc. | Command keywords with input detection windowing |
| US11551700B2 (en) | 2021-01-25 | 2023-01-10 | Sonos, Inc. | Systems and methods for power-efficient keyword detection |
| US11556307B2 (en) | 2020-01-31 | 2023-01-17 | Sonos, Inc. | Local voice data processing |
| US11562740B2 (en) | 2020-01-07 | 2023-01-24 | Sonos, Inc. | Voice verification for media playback |
| US11641559B2 (en) | 2016-09-27 | 2023-05-02 | Sonos, Inc. | Audio playback settings for voice interaction |
| US11698771B2 (en) | 2020-08-25 | 2023-07-11 | Sonos, Inc. | Vocal guidance engines for playback devices |
| US11727919B2 (en) | 2020-05-20 | 2023-08-15 | Sonos, Inc. | Memory allocation for keyword spotting engines |
| US11899519B2 (en) | 2018-10-23 | 2024-02-13 | Sonos, Inc. | Multiple stage network microphone device with reduced power consumption and processing load |
| US11984123B2 (en) | 2020-11-12 | 2024-05-14 | Sonos, Inc. | Network device interaction by range |
| US12283269B2 (en) | 2020-10-16 | 2025-04-22 | Sonos, Inc. | Intent inference in audiovisual communication sessions |
| US12327549B2 (en) | 2022-02-09 | 2025-06-10 | Sonos, Inc. | Gatekeeping for voice intent processing |
| US12327556B2 (en) | 2021-09-30 | 2025-06-10 | Sonos, Inc. | Enabling and disabling microphones and voice assistants |
| US12387716B2 (en) | 2020-06-08 | 2025-08-12 | Sonos, Inc. | Wakewordless voice quickstarts |
Families Citing this family (9)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN104536166B (en) * | 2014-12-18 | 2017-09-01 | 深圳市华星光电技术有限公司 | Copper-connection COA types liquid crystal panel dim spot restorative procedure and copper-connection COA type liquid crystal panel structures |
| KR102503756B1 (en) | 2015-11-04 | 2023-02-27 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Display device and manufacturing method thereof |
| DE102015119653A1 (en) * | 2015-11-13 | 2017-05-18 | Osram Opto Semiconductors Gmbh | Module for a video wall |
| CN205645818U (en) * | 2016-05-18 | 2016-10-12 | 武汉华星光电技术有限公司 | OLED (Organic light emitting diode) display panel |
| KR20180003687A (en) * | 2016-06-30 | 2018-01-10 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Reflective liquid crystal display |
| JP7050460B2 (en) | 2016-11-22 | 2022-04-08 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Display device |
| CN107390443B (en) * | 2017-09-05 | 2020-06-02 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Display panels and display devices |
| CN111077706A (en) * | 2019-12-06 | 2020-04-28 | Tcl华星光电技术有限公司 | COA substrate and manufacturing method thereof |
| CN115240566A (en) | 2021-04-23 | 2022-10-25 | 川奇光电科技(扬州)有限公司 | Electronic device and its circuit structure |
Citations (2)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US20020005905A1 (en) * | 2000-06-28 | 2002-01-17 | Shunpei Yamazaki | Semiconductor device and manufacturing method thereof |
| US20120223979A1 (en) * | 2011-03-02 | 2012-09-06 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Optical device, display device, and lighting device |
Family Cites Families (156)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US4580159A (en) | 1982-10-15 | 1986-04-01 | Nec Corporation | Color solid-state imager with color filter array formed by layers of hydrophilic and hydrophobic dye receiving resins |
| JPS60198861A (en) | 1984-03-23 | 1985-10-08 | Fujitsu Ltd | Thin film transistor |
| JPH0244256B2 (en) | 1987-01-28 | 1990-10-03 | Kagaku Gijutsucho Mukizaishitsu Kenkyushocho | INGAZN2O5DESHIMESARERUROTSUHOSHOKEINOSOJOKOZOOJUSURUKAGOBUTSUOYOBISONOSEIZOHO |
| JPH0244260B2 (en) | 1987-02-24 | 1990-10-03 | Kagaku Gijutsucho Mukizaishitsu Kenkyushocho | INGAZN5O8DESHIMESARERUROTSUHOSHOKEINOSOJOKOZOOJUSURUKAGOBUTSUOYOBISONOSEIZOHO |
| JPH0244258B2 (en) | 1987-02-24 | 1990-10-03 | Kagaku Gijutsucho Mukizaishitsu Kenkyushocho | INGAZN3O6DESHIMESARERUROTSUHOSHOKEINOSOJOKOZOOJUSURUKAGOBUTSUOYOBISONOSEIZOHO |
| JPS63210023A (en) | 1987-02-24 | 1988-08-31 | Natl Inst For Res In Inorg Mater | Compound having a hexagonal layered structure represented by InGaZn↓4O↓7 and its manufacturing method |
| JPH0244262B2 (en) | 1987-02-27 | 1990-10-03 | Kagaku Gijutsucho Mukizaishitsu Kenkyushocho | INGAZN6O9DESHIMESARERUROTSUHOSHOKEINOSOJOKOZOOJUSURUKAGOBUTSUOYOBISONOSEIZOHO |
| JPH0244263B2 (en) | 1987-04-22 | 1990-10-03 | Kagaku Gijutsucho Mukizaishitsu Kenkyushocho | INGAZN7O10DESHIMESARERUROTSUHOSHOKEINOSOJOKOZOOJUSURUKAGOBUTSUOYOBISONOSEIZOHO |
| JPH05251705A (en) | 1992-03-04 | 1993-09-28 | Fuji Xerox Co Ltd | Thin-film transistor |
| JP2952172B2 (en) | 1994-01-28 | 1999-09-20 | キヤノン株式会社 | Method for manufacturing color filter and method for manufacturing liquid crystal panel |
| DE69523351T2 (en) | 1994-01-28 | 2002-05-02 | Canon K.K., Tokio/Tokyo | Color filters, process for their manufacture, and liquid crystal panel |
| JP3479375B2 (en) | 1995-03-27 | 2003-12-15 | 科学技術振興事業団 | Metal oxide semiconductor device in which a pn junction is formed with a thin film transistor made of a metal oxide semiconductor such as cuprous oxide, and methods for manufacturing the same |
| JP3485997B2 (en) | 1995-04-14 | 2004-01-13 | シチズン時計株式会社 | Liquid crystal display |
| JP3881092B2 (en) | 1997-07-10 | 2007-02-14 | シチズン時計株式会社 | LCD panel |
| KR100394896B1 (en) | 1995-08-03 | 2003-11-28 | 코닌클리케 필립스 일렉트로닉스 엔.브이. | A semiconductor device including a transparent switching element |
| JP3625598B2 (en) | 1995-12-30 | 2005-03-02 | 三星電子株式会社 | Manufacturing method of liquid crystal display device |
| US6653216B1 (en) | 1998-06-08 | 2003-11-25 | Casio Computer Co., Ltd. | Transparent electrode forming apparatus and method of fabricating active matrix substrate |
| US6678017B1 (en) | 1998-06-08 | 2004-01-13 | Casio Computer Co., Ltd. | Display panel and method of fabricating the same |
| JP3329273B2 (en) | 1998-06-08 | 2002-09-30 | カシオ計算機株式会社 | Display device and manufacturing method thereof |
| JP4170454B2 (en) | 1998-07-24 | 2008-10-22 | Hoya株式会社 | Article having transparent conductive oxide thin film and method for producing the same |
| JP2000150861A (en) | 1998-11-16 | 2000-05-30 | Tdk Corp | Oxide thin film |
| JP3276930B2 (en) | 1998-11-17 | 2002-04-22 | 科学技術振興事業団 | Transistor and semiconductor device |
| JP3085530B2 (en) * | 1998-11-18 | 2000-09-11 | 日本電気株式会社 | Liquid crystal display device and method of manufacturing the same |
| JP2000162625A (en) | 1998-11-26 | 2000-06-16 | Sanyo Electric Co Ltd | Color reflection type liquid crystal display device and its production |
| JP2000187209A (en) * | 1998-12-22 | 2000-07-04 | Advanced Display Inc | Reflective liquid crystal display device and its production |
| TW460731B (en) | 1999-09-03 | 2001-10-21 | Ind Tech Res Inst | Electrode structure and production method of wide viewing angle LCD |
| TW522453B (en) | 1999-09-17 | 2003-03-01 | Semiconductor Energy Lab | Display device |
| JP4942867B2 (en) | 1999-09-17 | 2012-05-30 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | EL display device and electronic device |
| JP2001175198A (en) | 1999-12-14 | 2001-06-29 | Semiconductor Energy Lab Co Ltd | Semiconductor device and manufacturing method thereof |
| TW511298B (en) | 1999-12-15 | 2002-11-21 | Semiconductor Energy Lab | EL display device |
| JP2001305333A (en) | 2000-04-26 | 2001-10-31 | Dainippon Printing Co Ltd | Color filter and liquid crystal display |
| US6500701B2 (en) | 2000-04-28 | 2002-12-31 | Casio Computer Co., Ltd. | Method of manufacturing thin film transistor panel having protective film of channel region |
| JP4089858B2 (en) | 2000-09-01 | 2008-05-28 | 国立大学法人東北大学 | Semiconductor device |
| KR20020038482A (en) | 2000-11-15 | 2002-05-23 | 모리시타 요이찌 | Thin film transistor array, method for producing the same, and display panel using the same |
| JP3997731B2 (en) | 2001-03-19 | 2007-10-24 | 富士ゼロックス株式会社 | Method for forming a crystalline semiconductor thin film on a substrate |
| JP2002289859A (en) | 2001-03-23 | 2002-10-04 | Minolta Co Ltd | Thin film transistor |
| JP4583650B2 (en) * | 2001-04-16 | 2010-11-17 | Nec液晶テクノロジー株式会社 | Color liquid crystal panel, manufacturing method thereof, and color liquid crystal display device |
| KR100790352B1 (en) * | 2001-05-22 | 2008-01-02 | 엘지.필립스 엘시디 주식회사 | Reflective and transflective liquid crystal display devices and manufacturing methods thereof |
| JP4090716B2 (en) | 2001-09-10 | 2008-05-28 | 雅司 川崎 | Thin film transistor and matrix display device |
| JP3925839B2 (en) | 2001-09-10 | 2007-06-06 | シャープ株式会社 | Semiconductor memory device and test method thereof |
| WO2003040441A1 (en) | 2001-11-05 | 2003-05-15 | Japan Science And Technology Agency | Natural superlattice homologous single crystal thin film, method for preparation thereof, and device using said single crystal thin film |
| JP4164562B2 (en) | 2002-09-11 | 2008-10-15 | 独立行政法人科学技術振興機構 | Transparent thin film field effect transistor using homologous thin film as active layer |
| JP4025059B2 (en) * | 2001-11-26 | 2007-12-19 | 株式会社日立製作所 | Liquid crystal display |
| JP4003451B2 (en) | 2001-12-14 | 2007-11-07 | セイコーエプソン株式会社 | Electro-optical device substrate, electro-optical device, and electronic apparatus |
| JP2003195350A (en) | 2001-12-27 | 2003-07-09 | Sanyo Electric Co Ltd | Active matrix type display device |
| JP4718761B2 (en) | 2002-02-13 | 2011-07-06 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Method for manufacturing light emitting device |
| US6933520B2 (en) | 2002-02-13 | 2005-08-23 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Light emitting device |
| JP4083486B2 (en) | 2002-02-21 | 2008-04-30 | 独立行政法人科学技術振興機構 | Method for producing LnCuO (S, Se, Te) single crystal thin film |
| CN1445821A (en) | 2002-03-15 | 2003-10-01 | 三洋电机株式会社 | Forming method of ZnO film and ZnO semiconductor layer, semiconductor element and manufacturing method thereof |
| JP3933591B2 (en) | 2002-03-26 | 2007-06-20 | 淳二 城戸 | Organic electroluminescent device |
| US7339187B2 (en) | 2002-05-21 | 2008-03-04 | State Of Oregon Acting By And Through The Oregon State Board Of Higher Education On Behalf Of Oregon State University | Transistor structures |
| JP2004022625A (en) | 2002-06-13 | 2004-01-22 | Murata Mfg Co Ltd | Semiconductor device and method of manufacturing the semiconductor device |
| US7105868B2 (en) | 2002-06-24 | 2006-09-12 | Cermet, Inc. | High-electron mobility transistor with zinc oxide |
| US7111755B2 (en) | 2002-07-08 | 2006-09-26 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Liquid discharge method and apparatus and display device panel manufacturing method and apparatus |
| US7986087B2 (en) | 2002-10-08 | 2011-07-26 | Dai Nippon Printing Co., Ltd. | Color conversion media and EL-display using the same |
| US7067843B2 (en) | 2002-10-11 | 2006-06-27 | E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company | Transparent oxide semiconductor thin film transistors |
| JP4200830B2 (en) * | 2002-10-11 | 2008-12-24 | セイコーエプソン株式会社 | Electro-optical device manufacturing method, electro-optical device, and electronic apparatus |
| JP4095906B2 (en) | 2003-01-10 | 2008-06-04 | シャープ株式会社 | Liquid crystal display device and manufacturing method thereof |
| KR100945442B1 (en) * | 2003-02-28 | 2010-03-05 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | CIO structure transflective liquid crystal display |
| JP4166105B2 (en) | 2003-03-06 | 2008-10-15 | シャープ株式会社 | Semiconductor device and manufacturing method thereof |
| JP2004273732A (en) | 2003-03-07 | 2004-09-30 | Sharp Corp | Active matrix substrate and manufacturing method thereof |
| JP4108633B2 (en) | 2003-06-20 | 2008-06-25 | シャープ株式会社 | THIN FILM TRANSISTOR, MANUFACTURING METHOD THEREOF, AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE |
| US7262463B2 (en) | 2003-07-25 | 2007-08-28 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Transistor including a deposited channel region having a doped portion |
| US7541734B2 (en) | 2003-10-03 | 2009-06-02 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Light emitting device having a layer with a metal oxide and a benzoxazole derivative |
| WO2005055178A1 (en) * | 2003-12-02 | 2005-06-16 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display device, method for manufacturing the same, and television apparatus |
| CN1998087B (en) | 2004-03-12 | 2014-12-31 | 独立行政法人科学技术振兴机构 | Amorphous oxide and thin film transistor |
| US7297977B2 (en) | 2004-03-12 | 2007-11-20 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Semiconductor device |
| US7282782B2 (en) | 2004-03-12 | 2007-10-16 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Combined binary oxide semiconductor device |
| US7145174B2 (en) | 2004-03-12 | 2006-12-05 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, Lp. | Semiconductor device |
| KR100607519B1 (en) * | 2004-05-24 | 2006-08-02 | 엘지.필립스 엘시디 주식회사 | Thin film transistor substrate provided with color filter and manufacturing method thereof |
| CN100385303C (en) * | 2004-06-14 | 2008-04-30 | 夏普株式会社 | Liquid crystal display and manufacturing method thereof |
| US7211825B2 (en) | 2004-06-14 | 2007-05-01 | Yi-Chi Shih | Indium oxide-based thin film transistors and circuits |
| US20060038752A1 (en) | 2004-08-20 | 2006-02-23 | Eastman Kodak Company | Emission display |
| JP2006100760A (en) | 2004-09-02 | 2006-04-13 | Casio Comput Co Ltd | Thin film transistor and manufacturing method thereof |
| US7285501B2 (en) | 2004-09-17 | 2007-10-23 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Method of forming a solution processed device |
| US7298084B2 (en) | 2004-11-02 | 2007-11-20 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Methods and displays utilizing integrated zinc oxide row and column drivers in conjunction with organic light emitting diodes |
| AU2005302964B2 (en) | 2004-11-10 | 2010-11-04 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Field effect transistor employing an amorphous oxide |
| KR100953596B1 (en) | 2004-11-10 | 2010-04-21 | 캐논 가부시끼가이샤 | Light emitting device |
| US7829444B2 (en) | 2004-11-10 | 2010-11-09 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Field effect transistor manufacturing method |
| US7453065B2 (en) | 2004-11-10 | 2008-11-18 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Sensor and image pickup device |
| EP2453481B1 (en) | 2004-11-10 | 2017-01-11 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Field effect transistor with amorphous oxide |
| US7863611B2 (en) | 2004-11-10 | 2011-01-04 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Integrated circuits utilizing amorphous oxides |
| US7791072B2 (en) | 2004-11-10 | 2010-09-07 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Display |
| US7579224B2 (en) | 2005-01-21 | 2009-08-25 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Method for manufacturing a thin film semiconductor device |
| TWI505473B (en) | 2005-01-28 | 2015-10-21 | Semiconductor Energy Lab | Semiconductor device, electronic device, and method of manufacturing semiconductor device |
| TWI445178B (en) | 2005-01-28 | 2014-07-11 | Semiconductor Energy Lab | Semiconductor device, electronic device, and method of manufacturing semiconductor device |
| US7858451B2 (en) | 2005-02-03 | 2010-12-28 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Electronic device, semiconductor device and manufacturing method thereof |
| US7948171B2 (en) | 2005-02-18 | 2011-05-24 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Light emitting device |
| US20060197092A1 (en) | 2005-03-03 | 2006-09-07 | Randy Hoffman | System and method for forming conductive material on a substrate |
| US8681077B2 (en) | 2005-03-18 | 2014-03-25 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device, and display device, driving method and electronic apparatus thereof |
| US7544967B2 (en) | 2005-03-28 | 2009-06-09 | Massachusetts Institute Of Technology | Low voltage flexible organic/transparent transistor for selective gas sensing, photodetecting and CMOS device applications |
| US7645478B2 (en) | 2005-03-31 | 2010-01-12 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Methods of making displays |
| US8300031B2 (en) | 2005-04-20 | 2012-10-30 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device comprising transistor having gate and drain connected through a current-voltage conversion element |
| JP2006344849A (en) | 2005-06-10 | 2006-12-21 | Casio Comput Co Ltd | Thin film transistor |
| US7691666B2 (en) | 2005-06-16 | 2010-04-06 | Eastman Kodak Company | Methods of making thin film transistors comprising zinc-oxide-based semiconductor materials and transistors made thereby |
| US7402506B2 (en) | 2005-06-16 | 2008-07-22 | Eastman Kodak Company | Methods of making thin film transistors comprising zinc-oxide-based semiconductor materials and transistors made thereby |
| US7507618B2 (en) | 2005-06-27 | 2009-03-24 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Method for making electronic devices using metal oxide nanoparticles |
| KR100711890B1 (en) | 2005-07-28 | 2007-04-25 | 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 | OLED display and manufacturing method thereof |
| KR20070019457A (en) | 2005-08-12 | 2007-02-15 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Thin film transistor array panel and liquid crystal display including the same |
| JP2007059128A (en) | 2005-08-23 | 2007-03-08 | Canon Inc | Organic EL display device and manufacturing method thereof |
| JP4280736B2 (en) | 2005-09-06 | 2009-06-17 | キヤノン株式会社 | Semiconductor element |
| JP5116225B2 (en) | 2005-09-06 | 2013-01-09 | キヤノン株式会社 | Manufacturing method of oxide semiconductor device |
| JP4850457B2 (en) | 2005-09-06 | 2012-01-11 | キヤノン株式会社 | Thin film transistor and thin film diode |
| JP2007073705A (en) | 2005-09-06 | 2007-03-22 | Canon Inc | Oxide semiconductor channel thin film transistor and method for manufacturing the same |
| EP1770788A3 (en) | 2005-09-29 | 2011-09-21 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device having oxide semiconductor layer and manufacturing method thereof |
| JP5037808B2 (en) | 2005-10-20 | 2012-10-03 | キヤノン株式会社 | Field effect transistor using amorphous oxide, and display device using the transistor |
| CN101577231B (en) | 2005-11-15 | 2013-01-02 | 株式会社半导体能源研究所 | Semiconductor device and method of manufacturing the same |
| KR101308203B1 (en) | 2005-12-14 | 2013-09-13 | 샤프 가부시키가이샤 | Method of manufacturing an organic el display |
| TWI292281B (en) | 2005-12-29 | 2008-01-01 | Ind Tech Res Inst | Pixel structure of active organic light emitting diode and method of fabricating the same |
| US7867636B2 (en) | 2006-01-11 | 2011-01-11 | Murata Manufacturing Co., Ltd. | Transparent conductive film and method for manufacturing the same |
| JP2007188653A (en) | 2006-01-11 | 2007-07-26 | Seiko Epson Corp | LIGHT EMITTING DEVICE AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE |
| JP4977478B2 (en) | 2006-01-21 | 2012-07-18 | 三星電子株式会社 | ZnO film and method of manufacturing TFT using the same |
| US7576394B2 (en) | 2006-02-02 | 2009-08-18 | Kochi Industrial Promotion Center | Thin film transistor including low resistance conductive thin films and manufacturing method thereof |
| US7977169B2 (en) | 2006-02-15 | 2011-07-12 | Kochi Industrial Promotion Center | Semiconductor device including active layer made of zinc oxide with controlled orientations and manufacturing method thereof |
| US7791271B2 (en) | 2006-02-24 | 2010-09-07 | Global Oled Technology Llc | Top-emitting OLED device with light-scattering layer and color-conversion |
| KR20070092446A (en) * | 2006-03-10 | 2007-09-13 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Manufacturing method and liquid crystal display of color filter display panel |
| KR20070101595A (en) | 2006-04-11 | 2007-10-17 | 삼성전자주식회사 | ZnO TFT |
| US20070252928A1 (en) | 2006-04-28 | 2007-11-01 | Toppan Printing Co., Ltd. | Structure, transmission type liquid crystal display, reflection type display and manufacturing method thereof |
| JP5028033B2 (en) | 2006-06-13 | 2012-09-19 | キヤノン株式会社 | Oxide semiconductor film dry etching method |
| JP2008010298A (en) | 2006-06-29 | 2008-01-17 | Idemitsu Kosan Co Ltd | Color conversion substrate and color display device |
| JP4999400B2 (en) | 2006-08-09 | 2012-08-15 | キヤノン株式会社 | Oxide semiconductor film dry etching method |
| JP4609797B2 (en) | 2006-08-09 | 2011-01-12 | Nec液晶テクノロジー株式会社 | Thin film device and manufacturing method thereof |
| JP4332545B2 (en) | 2006-09-15 | 2009-09-16 | キヤノン株式会社 | Field effect transistor and manufacturing method thereof |
| JP4274219B2 (en) | 2006-09-27 | 2009-06-03 | セイコーエプソン株式会社 | Electronic devices, organic electroluminescence devices, organic thin film semiconductor devices |
| JP5164357B2 (en) | 2006-09-27 | 2013-03-21 | キヤノン株式会社 | Semiconductor device and manufacturing method of semiconductor device |
| US7622371B2 (en) | 2006-10-10 | 2009-11-24 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Fused nanocrystal thin film semiconductor and method |
| US7772021B2 (en) | 2006-11-29 | 2010-08-10 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Flat panel displays comprising a thin-film transistor having a semiconductive oxide in its channel and methods of fabricating the same for use in flat panel displays |
| JP2008140684A (en) | 2006-12-04 | 2008-06-19 | Toppan Printing Co Ltd | Color EL display and manufacturing method thereof |
| KR101303578B1 (en) | 2007-01-05 | 2013-09-09 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Etching method of thin film |
| US8207063B2 (en) | 2007-01-26 | 2012-06-26 | Eastman Kodak Company | Process for atomic layer deposition |
| JP2008226718A (en) | 2007-03-14 | 2008-09-25 | Fuji Electric Holdings Co Ltd | Organic EL device |
| KR100851215B1 (en) | 2007-03-14 | 2008-08-07 | 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 | Thin film transistor and organic light emitting display device using same |
| US7795613B2 (en) | 2007-04-17 | 2010-09-14 | Toppan Printing Co., Ltd. | Structure with transistor |
| KR101325053B1 (en) | 2007-04-18 | 2013-11-05 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Thin film transistor substrate and manufacturing method thereof |
| KR20080094300A (en) | 2007-04-19 | 2008-10-23 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Thin film transistors and methods of manufacturing the same and flat panel displays comprising thin film transistors |
| KR101334181B1 (en) | 2007-04-20 | 2013-11-28 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Thin Film Transistor having selectively crystallized channel layer and method of manufacturing the same |
| CN101663762B (en) | 2007-04-25 | 2011-09-21 | 佳能株式会社 | Oxynitride semiconductor |
| KR101345376B1 (en) | 2007-05-29 | 2013-12-24 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Fabrication method of ZnO family Thin film transistor |
| US7738050B2 (en) | 2007-07-06 | 2010-06-15 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd | Liquid crystal display device |
| WO2009014707A2 (en) | 2007-07-23 | 2009-01-29 | Qd Vision, Inc. | Quantum dot light enhancement substrate and lighting device including same |
| KR101398330B1 (en) * | 2007-08-31 | 2014-05-26 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Transreflective liquid crystal display and method for manufacturing the same |
| WO2009037874A1 (en) | 2007-09-19 | 2009-03-26 | Fuji Electric Holdings Co., Ltd. | Color conversion filter, and process for producing color conversion filter and organic el display |
| US8202365B2 (en) | 2007-12-17 | 2012-06-19 | Fujifilm Corporation | Process for producing oriented inorganic crystalline film, and semiconductor device using the oriented inorganic crystalline film |
| JP4932758B2 (en) | 2008-02-06 | 2012-05-16 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Light emitting device and manufacturing method thereof |
| JP4623179B2 (en) | 2008-09-18 | 2011-02-02 | ソニー株式会社 | Thin film transistor and manufacturing method thereof |
| JP5451280B2 (en) | 2008-10-09 | 2014-03-26 | キヤノン株式会社 | Wurtzite crystal growth substrate, manufacturing method thereof, and semiconductor device |
| JP5312909B2 (en) | 2008-11-11 | 2013-10-09 | シャープ株式会社 | Color conversion filter panel for color organic EL display and color organic EL display |
| JP2010165961A (en) | 2009-01-19 | 2010-07-29 | Videocon Global Ltd | Thin-film transistor, display device, and method of manufacturing the same |
| JP2010198735A (en) | 2009-02-20 | 2010-09-09 | Fujifilm Corp | Optical member and organic electroluminescent display device equipped with the same |
| JP4762327B2 (en) | 2009-03-24 | 2011-08-31 | シャープ株式会社 | Image processing apparatus and image forming apparatus |
| KR101094298B1 (en) | 2009-08-18 | 2011-12-19 | 삼성모바일디스플레이주식회사 | Organic light emitting display |
| RU2503051C2 (en) | 2009-10-15 | 2013-12-27 | Шарп Кабушики Каиша | Liquid crystal display panel, method of making said panel and liquid crystal display device |
| CN102681276B (en) * | 2012-02-28 | 2014-07-09 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Array substrate, method for manufacturing same and display device comprising same |
| CN102654594B (en) * | 2012-03-16 | 2015-02-25 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Half-transmitting and half-reflecting type color filter and manufacturing method thereof |
| KR101451403B1 (en) * | 2012-06-26 | 2014-10-23 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Thin Film Transistor Substrate Having Metal Oxide Semiconductor And Method For Manufacturing The Same |
| KR102138212B1 (en) | 2013-03-27 | 2020-07-27 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | Display device and electronic device |
-
2014
- 2014-10-09 TW TW103135203A patent/TWI642170B/en active
- 2014-10-13 KR KR20140137920A patent/KR20150045365A/en not_active Ceased
- 2014-10-16 JP JP2014211294A patent/JP2015156012A/en not_active Withdrawn
- 2014-10-16 US US14/516,103 patent/US9553114B2/en active Active
- 2014-10-17 CN CN201410551082.9A patent/CN104570522A/en active Pending
-
2017
- 2017-01-17 US US15/407,686 patent/US20170123251A1/en not_active Abandoned
-
2019
- 2019-09-10 JP JP2019164394A patent/JP2019219688A/en not_active Withdrawn
Patent Citations (2)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US20020005905A1 (en) * | 2000-06-28 | 2002-01-17 | Shunpei Yamazaki | Semiconductor device and manufacturing method thereof |
| US20120223979A1 (en) * | 2011-03-02 | 2012-09-06 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Optical device, display device, and lighting device |
Cited By (163)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US10555077B2 (en) | 2016-02-22 | 2020-02-04 | Sonos, Inc. | Music service selection |
| US11556306B2 (en) | 2016-02-22 | 2023-01-17 | Sonos, Inc. | Voice controlled media playback system |
| US11514898B2 (en) | 2016-02-22 | 2022-11-29 | Sonos, Inc. | Voice control of a media playback system |
| US10212512B2 (en) | 2016-02-22 | 2019-02-19 | Sonos, Inc. | Default playback devices |
| US10225651B2 (en) | 2016-02-22 | 2019-03-05 | Sonos, Inc. | Default playback device designation |
| US12047752B2 (en) | 2016-02-22 | 2024-07-23 | Sonos, Inc. | Content mixing |
| US11513763B2 (en) | 2016-02-22 | 2022-11-29 | Sonos, Inc. | Audio response playback |
| US11726742B2 (en) | 2016-02-22 | 2023-08-15 | Sonos, Inc. | Handling of loss of pairing between networked devices |
| US11405430B2 (en) | 2016-02-22 | 2022-08-02 | Sonos, Inc. | Networked microphone device control |
| US10365889B2 (en) | 2016-02-22 | 2019-07-30 | Sonos, Inc. | Metadata exchange involving a networked playback system and a networked microphone system |
| US10409549B2 (en) | 2016-02-22 | 2019-09-10 | Sonos, Inc. | Audio response playback |
| US10970035B2 (en) | 2016-02-22 | 2021-04-06 | Sonos, Inc. | Audio response playback |
| US11983463B2 (en) | 2016-02-22 | 2024-05-14 | Sonos, Inc. | Metadata exchange involving a networked playback system and a networked microphone system |
| US10499146B2 (en) | 2016-02-22 | 2019-12-03 | Sonos, Inc. | Voice control of a media playback system |
| US10509626B2 (en) | 2016-02-22 | 2019-12-17 | Sonos, Inc | Handling of loss of pairing between networked devices |
| US11212612B2 (en) | 2016-02-22 | 2021-12-28 | Sonos, Inc. | Voice control of a media playback system |
| US10142754B2 (en) * | 2016-02-22 | 2018-11-27 | Sonos, Inc. | Sensor on moving component of transducer |
| US10847143B2 (en) | 2016-02-22 | 2020-11-24 | Sonos, Inc. | Voice control of a media playback system |
| US11184704B2 (en) | 2016-02-22 | 2021-11-23 | Sonos, Inc. | Music service selection |
| US11137979B2 (en) | 2016-02-22 | 2021-10-05 | Sonos, Inc. | Metadata exchange involving a networked playback system and a networked microphone system |
| US10764679B2 (en) | 2016-02-22 | 2020-09-01 | Sonos, Inc. | Voice control of a media playback system |
| US11750969B2 (en) | 2016-02-22 | 2023-09-05 | Sonos, Inc. | Default playback device designation |
| US11042355B2 (en) | 2016-02-22 | 2021-06-22 | Sonos, Inc. | Handling of loss of pairing between networked devices |
| US11736860B2 (en) | 2016-02-22 | 2023-08-22 | Sonos, Inc. | Voice control of a media playback system |
| US11863593B2 (en) | 2016-02-22 | 2024-01-02 | Sonos, Inc. | Networked microphone device control |
| US20170245054A1 (en) * | 2016-02-22 | 2017-08-24 | Sonos, Inc. | Sensor on Moving Component of Transducer |
| US11006214B2 (en) | 2016-02-22 | 2021-05-11 | Sonos, Inc. | Default playback device designation |
| US11832068B2 (en) | 2016-02-22 | 2023-11-28 | Sonos, Inc. | Music service selection |
| US10971139B2 (en) | 2016-02-22 | 2021-04-06 | Sonos, Inc. | Voice control of a media playback system |
| US10740065B2 (en) | 2016-02-22 | 2020-08-11 | Sonos, Inc. | Voice controlled media playback system |
| US10743101B2 (en) | 2016-02-22 | 2020-08-11 | Sonos, Inc. | Content mixing |
| US10714115B2 (en) | 2016-06-09 | 2020-07-14 | Sonos, Inc. | Dynamic player selection for audio signal processing |
| US11133018B2 (en) | 2016-06-09 | 2021-09-28 | Sonos, Inc. | Dynamic player selection for audio signal processing |
| US11545169B2 (en) | 2016-06-09 | 2023-01-03 | Sonos, Inc. | Dynamic player selection for audio signal processing |
| US10332537B2 (en) | 2016-06-09 | 2019-06-25 | Sonos, Inc. | Dynamic player selection for audio signal processing |
| US11184969B2 (en) | 2016-07-15 | 2021-11-23 | Sonos, Inc. | Contextualization of voice inputs |
| US10699711B2 (en) | 2016-07-15 | 2020-06-30 | Sonos, Inc. | Voice detection by multiple devices |
| US11664023B2 (en) | 2016-07-15 | 2023-05-30 | Sonos, Inc. | Voice detection by multiple devices |
| US10297256B2 (en) | 2016-07-15 | 2019-05-21 | Sonos, Inc. | Voice detection by multiple devices |
| US10593331B2 (en) | 2016-07-15 | 2020-03-17 | Sonos, Inc. | Contextualization of voice inputs |
| US11979960B2 (en) | 2016-07-15 | 2024-05-07 | Sonos, Inc. | Contextualization of voice inputs |
| US10565998B2 (en) | 2016-08-05 | 2020-02-18 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device supporting concurrent voice assistant services |
| US10354658B2 (en) | 2016-08-05 | 2019-07-16 | Sonos, Inc. | Voice control of playback device using voice assistant service(s) |
| US11531520B2 (en) | 2016-08-05 | 2022-12-20 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device supporting concurrent voice assistants |
| US10565999B2 (en) | 2016-08-05 | 2020-02-18 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device supporting concurrent voice assistant services |
| US10847164B2 (en) | 2016-08-05 | 2020-11-24 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device supporting concurrent voice assistants |
| US11641559B2 (en) | 2016-09-27 | 2023-05-02 | Sonos, Inc. | Audio playback settings for voice interaction |
| US10313812B2 (en) | 2016-09-30 | 2019-06-04 | Sonos, Inc. | Orientation-based playback device microphone selection |
| US11516610B2 (en) | 2016-09-30 | 2022-11-29 | Sonos, Inc. | Orientation-based playback device microphone selection |
| US10873819B2 (en) | 2016-09-30 | 2020-12-22 | Sonos, Inc. | Orientation-based playback device microphone selection |
| US11308961B2 (en) | 2016-10-19 | 2022-04-19 | Sonos, Inc. | Arbitration-based voice recognition |
| US10614807B2 (en) | 2016-10-19 | 2020-04-07 | Sonos, Inc. | Arbitration-based voice recognition |
| US11727933B2 (en) | 2016-10-19 | 2023-08-15 | Sonos, Inc. | Arbitration-based voice recognition |
| US10181323B2 (en) | 2016-10-19 | 2019-01-15 | Sonos, Inc. | Arbitration-based voice recognition |
| US12217748B2 (en) | 2017-03-27 | 2025-02-04 | Sonos, Inc. | Systems and methods of multiple voice services |
| US11183181B2 (en) | 2017-03-27 | 2021-11-23 | Sonos, Inc. | Systems and methods of multiple voice services |
| US11900937B2 (en) | 2017-08-07 | 2024-02-13 | Sonos, Inc. | Wake-word detection suppression |
| US11380322B2 (en) | 2017-08-07 | 2022-07-05 | Sonos, Inc. | Wake-word detection suppression |
| US11080005B2 (en) | 2017-09-08 | 2021-08-03 | Sonos, Inc. | Dynamic computation of system response volume |
| US10445057B2 (en) | 2017-09-08 | 2019-10-15 | Sonos, Inc. | Dynamic computation of system response volume |
| US11500611B2 (en) | 2017-09-08 | 2022-11-15 | Sonos, Inc. | Dynamic computation of system response volume |
| US11017789B2 (en) | 2017-09-27 | 2021-05-25 | Sonos, Inc. | Robust Short-Time Fourier Transform acoustic echo cancellation during audio playback |
| US11646045B2 (en) | 2017-09-27 | 2023-05-09 | Sonos, Inc. | Robust short-time fourier transform acoustic echo cancellation during audio playback |
| US11302326B2 (en) | 2017-09-28 | 2022-04-12 | Sonos, Inc. | Tone interference cancellation |
| US10511904B2 (en) | 2017-09-28 | 2019-12-17 | Sonos, Inc. | Three-dimensional beam forming with a microphone array |
| US10891932B2 (en) | 2017-09-28 | 2021-01-12 | Sonos, Inc. | Multi-channel acoustic echo cancellation |
| US12236932B2 (en) | 2017-09-28 | 2025-02-25 | Sonos, Inc. | Multi-channel acoustic echo cancellation |
| US12047753B1 (en) | 2017-09-28 | 2024-07-23 | Sonos, Inc. | Three-dimensional beam forming with a microphone array |
| US11769505B2 (en) | 2017-09-28 | 2023-09-26 | Sonos, Inc. | Echo of tone interferance cancellation using two acoustic echo cancellers |
| US11538451B2 (en) | 2017-09-28 | 2022-12-27 | Sonos, Inc. | Multi-channel acoustic echo cancellation |
| US10880644B1 (en) | 2017-09-28 | 2020-12-29 | Sonos, Inc. | Three-dimensional beam forming with a microphone array |
| US10621981B2 (en) | 2017-09-28 | 2020-04-14 | Sonos, Inc. | Tone interference cancellation |
| US10466962B2 (en) | 2017-09-29 | 2019-11-05 | Sonos, Inc. | Media playback system with voice assistance |
| US11893308B2 (en) | 2017-09-29 | 2024-02-06 | Sonos, Inc. | Media playback system with concurrent voice assistance |
| US10606555B1 (en) | 2017-09-29 | 2020-03-31 | Sonos, Inc. | Media playback system with concurrent voice assistance |
| US11175888B2 (en) | 2017-09-29 | 2021-11-16 | Sonos, Inc. | Media playback system with concurrent voice assistance |
| US11288039B2 (en) | 2017-09-29 | 2022-03-29 | Sonos, Inc. | Media playback system with concurrent voice assistance |
| US10880650B2 (en) | 2017-12-10 | 2020-12-29 | Sonos, Inc. | Network microphone devices with automatic do not disturb actuation capabilities |
| US11451908B2 (en) | 2017-12-10 | 2022-09-20 | Sonos, Inc. | Network microphone devices with automatic do not disturb actuation capabilities |
| US11676590B2 (en) | 2017-12-11 | 2023-06-13 | Sonos, Inc. | Home graph |
| US10818290B2 (en) | 2017-12-11 | 2020-10-27 | Sonos, Inc. | Home graph |
| US11689858B2 (en) | 2018-01-31 | 2023-06-27 | Sonos, Inc. | Device designation of playback and network microphone device arrangements |
| US11343614B2 (en) | 2018-01-31 | 2022-05-24 | Sonos, Inc. | Device designation of playback and network microphone device arrangements |
| US11797263B2 (en) | 2018-05-10 | 2023-10-24 | Sonos, Inc. | Systems and methods for voice-assisted media content selection |
| US12360734B2 (en) | 2018-05-10 | 2025-07-15 | Sonos, Inc. | Systems and methods for voice-assisted media content selection |
| US11175880B2 (en) | 2018-05-10 | 2021-11-16 | Sonos, Inc. | Systems and methods for voice-assisted media content selection |
| US11715489B2 (en) | 2018-05-18 | 2023-08-01 | Sonos, Inc. | Linear filtering for noise-suppressed speech detection |
| US10847178B2 (en) | 2018-05-18 | 2020-11-24 | Sonos, Inc. | Linear filtering for noise-suppressed speech detection |
| US10959029B2 (en) | 2018-05-25 | 2021-03-23 | Sonos, Inc. | Determining and adapting to changes in microphone performance of playback devices |
| US11792590B2 (en) | 2018-05-25 | 2023-10-17 | Sonos, Inc. | Determining and adapting to changes in microphone performance of playback devices |
| US11696074B2 (en) | 2018-06-28 | 2023-07-04 | Sonos, Inc. | Systems and methods for associating playback devices with voice assistant services |
| US11197096B2 (en) | 2018-06-28 | 2021-12-07 | Sonos, Inc. | Systems and methods for associating playback devices with voice assistant services |
| US10797667B2 (en) | 2018-08-28 | 2020-10-06 | Sonos, Inc. | Audio notifications |
| US11482978B2 (en) | 2018-08-28 | 2022-10-25 | Sonos, Inc. | Audio notifications |
| US11076035B2 (en) | 2018-08-28 | 2021-07-27 | Sonos, Inc. | Do not disturb feature for audio notifications |
| US11563842B2 (en) | 2018-08-28 | 2023-01-24 | Sonos, Inc. | Do not disturb feature for audio notifications |
| US11551690B2 (en) | 2018-09-14 | 2023-01-10 | Sonos, Inc. | Networked devices, systems, and methods for intelligently deactivating wake-word engines |
| US11432030B2 (en) | 2018-09-14 | 2022-08-30 | Sonos, Inc. | Networked devices, systems, and methods for associating playback devices based on sound codes |
| US11778259B2 (en) | 2018-09-14 | 2023-10-03 | Sonos, Inc. | Networked devices, systems and methods for associating playback devices based on sound codes |
| US10587430B1 (en) | 2018-09-14 | 2020-03-10 | Sonos, Inc. | Networked devices, systems, and methods for associating playback devices based on sound codes |
| US10878811B2 (en) | 2018-09-14 | 2020-12-29 | Sonos, Inc. | Networked devices, systems, and methods for intelligently deactivating wake-word engines |
| US11790937B2 (en) | 2018-09-21 | 2023-10-17 | Sonos, Inc. | Voice detection optimization using sound metadata |
| US11024331B2 (en) | 2018-09-21 | 2021-06-01 | Sonos, Inc. | Voice detection optimization using sound metadata |
| US12230291B2 (en) | 2018-09-21 | 2025-02-18 | Sonos, Inc. | Voice detection optimization using sound metadata |
| US10811015B2 (en) | 2018-09-25 | 2020-10-20 | Sonos, Inc. | Voice detection optimization based on selected voice assistant service |
| US10573321B1 (en) | 2018-09-25 | 2020-02-25 | Sonos, Inc. | Voice detection optimization based on selected voice assistant service |
| US12165651B2 (en) | 2018-09-25 | 2024-12-10 | Sonos, Inc. | Voice detection optimization based on selected voice assistant service |
| US11031014B2 (en) | 2018-09-25 | 2021-06-08 | Sonos, Inc. | Voice detection optimization based on selected voice assistant service |
| US11727936B2 (en) | 2018-09-25 | 2023-08-15 | Sonos, Inc. | Voice detection optimization based on selected voice assistant service |
| US11790911B2 (en) | 2018-09-28 | 2023-10-17 | Sonos, Inc. | Systems and methods for selective wake word detection using neural network models |
| US11100923B2 (en) | 2018-09-28 | 2021-08-24 | Sonos, Inc. | Systems and methods for selective wake word detection using neural network models |
| US12165644B2 (en) | 2018-09-28 | 2024-12-10 | Sonos, Inc. | Systems and methods for selective wake word detection |
| US12062383B2 (en) | 2018-09-29 | 2024-08-13 | Sonos, Inc. | Linear filtering for noise-suppressed speech detection via multiple network microphone devices |
| US11501795B2 (en) | 2018-09-29 | 2022-11-15 | Sonos, Inc. | Linear filtering for noise-suppressed speech detection via multiple network microphone devices |
| US10692518B2 (en) | 2018-09-29 | 2020-06-23 | Sonos, Inc. | Linear filtering for noise-suppressed speech detection via multiple network microphone devices |
| US11899519B2 (en) | 2018-10-23 | 2024-02-13 | Sonos, Inc. | Multiple stage network microphone device with reduced power consumption and processing load |
| US11741948B2 (en) | 2018-11-15 | 2023-08-29 | Sonos Vox France Sas | Dilated convolutions and gating for efficient keyword spotting |
| US11200889B2 (en) | 2018-11-15 | 2021-12-14 | Sonos, Inc. | Dilated convolutions and gating for efficient keyword spotting |
| US11183183B2 (en) | 2018-12-07 | 2021-11-23 | Sonos, Inc. | Systems and methods of operating media playback systems having multiple voice assistant services |
| US11557294B2 (en) | 2018-12-07 | 2023-01-17 | Sonos, Inc. | Systems and methods of operating media playback systems having multiple voice assistant services |
| US11132989B2 (en) | 2018-12-13 | 2021-09-28 | Sonos, Inc. | Networked microphone devices, systems, and methods of localized arbitration |
| US11538460B2 (en) | 2018-12-13 | 2022-12-27 | Sonos, Inc. | Networked microphone devices, systems, and methods of localized arbitration |
| US11540047B2 (en) | 2018-12-20 | 2022-12-27 | Sonos, Inc. | Optimization of network microphone devices using noise classification |
| US10602268B1 (en) | 2018-12-20 | 2020-03-24 | Sonos, Inc. | Optimization of network microphone devices using noise classification |
| US11159880B2 (en) | 2018-12-20 | 2021-10-26 | Sonos, Inc. | Optimization of network microphone devices using noise classification |
| US10867604B2 (en) | 2019-02-08 | 2020-12-15 | Sonos, Inc. | Devices, systems, and methods for distributed voice processing |
| US11315556B2 (en) | 2019-02-08 | 2022-04-26 | Sonos, Inc. | Devices, systems, and methods for distributed voice processing by transmitting sound data associated with a wake word to an appropriate device for identification |
| US11646023B2 (en) | 2019-02-08 | 2023-05-09 | Sonos, Inc. | Devices, systems, and methods for distributed voice processing |
| US11120794B2 (en) | 2019-05-03 | 2021-09-14 | Sonos, Inc. | Voice assistant persistence across multiple network microphone devices |
| US11798553B2 (en) | 2019-05-03 | 2023-10-24 | Sonos, Inc. | Voice assistant persistence across multiple network microphone devices |
| US11501773B2 (en) | 2019-06-12 | 2022-11-15 | Sonos, Inc. | Network microphone device with command keyword conditioning |
| US11854547B2 (en) | 2019-06-12 | 2023-12-26 | Sonos, Inc. | Network microphone device with command keyword eventing |
| US10586540B1 (en) | 2019-06-12 | 2020-03-10 | Sonos, Inc. | Network microphone device with command keyword conditioning |
| US11361756B2 (en) | 2019-06-12 | 2022-06-14 | Sonos, Inc. | Conditional wake word eventing based on environment |
| US11200894B2 (en) | 2019-06-12 | 2021-12-14 | Sonos, Inc. | Network microphone device with command keyword eventing |
| US11710487B2 (en) | 2019-07-31 | 2023-07-25 | Sonos, Inc. | Locally distributed keyword detection |
| US11551669B2 (en) | 2019-07-31 | 2023-01-10 | Sonos, Inc. | Locally distributed keyword detection |
| US11714600B2 (en) | 2019-07-31 | 2023-08-01 | Sonos, Inc. | Noise classification for event detection |
| US10871943B1 (en) | 2019-07-31 | 2020-12-22 | Sonos, Inc. | Noise classification for event detection |
| US11138975B2 (en) | 2019-07-31 | 2021-10-05 | Sonos, Inc. | Locally distributed keyword detection |
| US11138969B2 (en) | 2019-07-31 | 2021-10-05 | Sonos, Inc. | Locally distributed keyword detection |
| US12211490B2 (en) | 2019-07-31 | 2025-01-28 | Sonos, Inc. | Locally distributed keyword detection |
| US11354092B2 (en) | 2019-07-31 | 2022-06-07 | Sonos, Inc. | Noise classification for event detection |
| US11862161B2 (en) | 2019-10-22 | 2024-01-02 | Sonos, Inc. | VAS toggle based on device orientation |
| US11189286B2 (en) | 2019-10-22 | 2021-11-30 | Sonos, Inc. | VAS toggle based on device orientation |
| US11869503B2 (en) | 2019-12-20 | 2024-01-09 | Sonos, Inc. | Offline voice control |
| US11200900B2 (en) | 2019-12-20 | 2021-12-14 | Sonos, Inc. | Offline voice control |
| US11562740B2 (en) | 2020-01-07 | 2023-01-24 | Sonos, Inc. | Voice verification for media playback |
| US11556307B2 (en) | 2020-01-31 | 2023-01-17 | Sonos, Inc. | Local voice data processing |
| US11308958B2 (en) | 2020-02-07 | 2022-04-19 | Sonos, Inc. | Localized wakeword verification |
| US11961519B2 (en) | 2020-02-07 | 2024-04-16 | Sonos, Inc. | Localized wakeword verification |
| US11694689B2 (en) | 2020-05-20 | 2023-07-04 | Sonos, Inc. | Input detection windowing |
| US11482224B2 (en) | 2020-05-20 | 2022-10-25 | Sonos, Inc. | Command keywords with input detection windowing |
| US11727919B2 (en) | 2020-05-20 | 2023-08-15 | Sonos, Inc. | Memory allocation for keyword spotting engines |
| US11308962B2 (en) | 2020-05-20 | 2022-04-19 | Sonos, Inc. | Input detection windowing |
| US12387716B2 (en) | 2020-06-08 | 2025-08-12 | Sonos, Inc. | Wakewordless voice quickstarts |
| US11698771B2 (en) | 2020-08-25 | 2023-07-11 | Sonos, Inc. | Vocal guidance engines for playback devices |
| US12283269B2 (en) | 2020-10-16 | 2025-04-22 | Sonos, Inc. | Intent inference in audiovisual communication sessions |
| US11984123B2 (en) | 2020-11-12 | 2024-05-14 | Sonos, Inc. | Network device interaction by range |
| US12424220B2 (en) | 2020-11-12 | 2025-09-23 | Sonos, Inc. | Network device interaction by range |
| US11551700B2 (en) | 2021-01-25 | 2023-01-10 | Sonos, Inc. | Systems and methods for power-efficient keyword detection |
| US12327556B2 (en) | 2021-09-30 | 2025-06-10 | Sonos, Inc. | Enabling and disabling microphones and voice assistants |
| US12327549B2 (en) | 2022-02-09 | 2025-06-10 | Sonos, Inc. | Gatekeeping for voice intent processing |
Also Published As
| Publication number | Publication date |
|---|---|
| TW201519418A (en) | 2015-05-16 |
| TWI642170B (en) | 2018-11-21 |
| US20150108471A1 (en) | 2015-04-23 |
| KR20150045365A (en) | 2015-04-28 |
| JP2019219688A (en) | 2019-12-26 |
| US9553114B2 (en) | 2017-01-24 |
| CN104570522A (en) | 2015-04-29 |
| JP2015156012A (en) | 2015-08-27 |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| US9553114B2 (en) | Display device and electronic device with a color filter | |
| JP7662599B2 (en) | Display device | |
| US9502440B2 (en) | Display device and electronic device | |
| JP7460314B2 (en) | Method for manufacturing a display device | |
| KR102536099B1 (en) | Display device, display module, and electronic device | |
| TWI496122B (en) | Display device | |
| KR101749038B1 (en) | Liquid crystal display device | |
| KR20190016995A (en) | A liquid crystal display device | |
| US9130367B2 (en) | Display device | |
| JP7439163B2 (en) | display device | |
| JP6263044B2 (en) | Liquid crystal display | |
| JP7315572B2 (en) | Displays and electronics | |
| JP2018129462A (en) | Display device and manufacturing method thereof |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| STCB | Information on status: application discontinuation |
Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION |